MLSC2 - Woodward

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 198

37444A

MSLC-2
Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Manual
Software Version 1.14xx

Manual 37444A

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

WARNING
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions.
Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an overspeed (overtemperature, or overpressure, where applicable) shutdown device(s), that operates totally independently of the
prime mover control device(s) to protect against runaway or damage to the engine, turbine, or other
type of prime mover with possible personal injury or loss of life should the mechanical-hydraulic governor(s) or electric control(s), the actuator(s), fuel control(s), the driving mechanism(s), the linkage(s),
or the controlled device(s) fail.
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical, electrical,
or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the
equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within
the meaning of the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage
and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or battery-charging device, make sure
the charging device is turned off before disconnecting the battery from the system.
Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the following precautions to prevent damage to these parts.

Discharge body static before handling the control (with power to the control turned off, contact a
grounded surface and maintain contact while handling the control).

Avoid all plastic, vinyl and Styrofoam (except antistatic versions) around printed circuit boards.

Do not touch the components or conductors on a printed circuit board with your hands or with
conductive devices.

OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced. To verify that you
have the latest revision, be sure to check the Woodward website:
http://www.woodward.com/pubs/current.pdf
The revision level is shown at the bottom of the front cover after the publication number. The latest
version of most publications is available at:
http://www.woodward.com/publications
If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative to get the latest
copy.

Important definitions
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in damage to equipment.

NOTE
Provides other helpful information that does not fall under the warning or caution categories.
Woodward reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by Woodward is believed to be
correct and reliable. However, Woodward assumes no responsibility unless otherwise expressly undertaken.

Woodward
All Rights Reserved.

Page 2/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Revision History
Rev. Date
NEW 11-03-24
A
11-05-13

Editor
TE
TE

Changes
New Release

Minor corrections
New features
Requirements: Master synchronizer and load control (MSLC-2)with software revision 1.1404 or
higher and device revision A or higher.

Synchronizer description: Manual synchronizing. Refer to Manual Synchronizing on page


140 for details.
Modbus communication: Loss of connection. Refer to Loss Of Connection on page 165
for details.

Content

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 11


Document Overview ............................................................................................................................... 11
Application .............................................................................................................................................. 12
Synchronizer .......................................................................................................................................... 12
Load Control ........................................................................................................................................... 13
Process Control ...................................................................................................................................... 14
Var/PF Control ....................................................................................................................................... 14
DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 Systems ................................................................................................................... 15

CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 17


Electrostatic Discharge Awareness ....................................................................................................... 17
Unpacking .............................................................................................................................................. 18
Location .................................................................................................................................................. 18
Housing .................................................................................................................................................. 19
Dimensions .................................................................................................................................. 19
Installation .................................................................................................................................... 20
Terminal Arrangement ................................................................................................................. 21
Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................................................... 22
Connections ........................................................................................................................................... 24
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................... 25
Voltage Measuring ....................................................................................................................... 26
Current Measuring ....................................................................................................................... 36
Power Factor Definition................................................................................................................ 39
Discrete Inputs ............................................................................................................................. 41
Relay Outputs .............................................................................................................................. 43
Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 45
Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................... 46

Woodward

Page 3/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

CHAPTER 3. CONFIGURATION & OPERATION ........................................................................... 48


Configuration Via PC ............................................................................................................................. 48
Install ToolKit Configuration and Visualization Software ............................................................. 48
Install ToolKit Software ................................................................................................................ 48
Install ToolKit Configuration Files ................................................................................................ 49
Starting ToolKit Software ............................................................................................................. 50
Configure ToolKit Software ......................................................................................................... 51
Connect ToolKit and the MSLC-2 Unit ........................................................................................ 52
View MSLC-2 Data with ToolKit .................................................................................................. 53
Configure the MSLC-2 with ToolKit ............................................................................................. 54
The MSLC-2 Version Page ......................................................................................................... 55
Menu (Setpoint) Description .................................................................................................................. 56
MSLC-2 Homepage .................................................................................................................. 56
Menu 1 Synchronizer ............................................................................................................... 61
Menu 2 Load Control ................................................................................................................ 65
Menu 3 Process Control ........................................................................................................... 69
Menu 4 Voltage/Var/PF Control ............................................................................................... 71
Menu 5 Configuration ............................................................................................................... 75
Menu 6 Analog Inputs .............................................................................................................. 87
Menu 7 Electrical Parameters .................................................................................................. 92
Menu 8 Control Status Monitor ................................................................................................. 95
Menu 9 Discrete Inputs / Relay Outputs .................................................................................. 98
Menu 0 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 101
Overview Pages ........................................................................................................................ 103
Prestart Setup Procedure .................................................................................................................... 105
Configuration Menu ................................................................................................................... 105
Prestart Segmenting Setup ....................................................................................................... 106
Prestart Synchronizer Setup ..................................................................................................... 110
Prestart Load Control Setup ...................................................................................................... 110
Prestart Process Control Setup ................................................................................................. 110
Prestart Var/Power Factor Control Setup .................................................................................. 110
MSLC-2 Control Adjustments .............................................................................................................. 111
Calibration Check ................................................................................................................................ 111
Synchronizer Adjustments ................................................................................................................... 112
Preliminary Synchronizer Adjustments...................................................................................... 112
Phase Matching Synchronizer ................................................................................................... 112
Slip Frequency Synchronizer .................................................................................................... 113
Final Synchronizer Setup .......................................................................................................... 114
Voltage Matching Adjustments ............................................................................................................ 114
Preliminary Voltage Matching Setup ......................................................................................... 114
Final Voltage Matching Setup ................................................................................................... 115
Load Control Adjustment ..................................................................................................................... 115
Base Load Mode Setup ............................................................................................................. 115
Remote Base Load .................................................................................................................... 115
Import/Export Mode Setup ........................................................................................................ 116
Remote Import/Export Setup ..................................................................................................... 116
Final Load Control Setup ........................................................................................................... 117
Process Control Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 118
Var/PF Control Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 119
Constant Generator Power Factor Setup .................................................................................. 119
PF Control At The Utility - Setup ............................................................................................... 120
Remote PF Control At The Utility - Setup ................................................................................. 120
Var Control At The Utility - Setup .............................................................................................. 121

Page 4/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

CHAPTER 4. SYNCHRONIZER DESCRIPTION ........................................................................... 122


Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 122
Functional Description.......................................................................................................................... 122
Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................... 122
Measurement Connections (Examples)..................................................................................... 124
Dead Bus Closing Multiple Units ............................................................................................ 136
Voltage Matching ....................................................................................................................... 137
Phase Matching Synchronizing ................................................................................................. 137
Slip Frequency Synchronizing ................................................................................................... 137
Permissive Mode / Synch-Check Function ................................................................................ 137
GCB Maximun Closing Attempts ............................................................................................... 138
Auto re-synchronization ............................................................................................................. 138
Reclose limit alarm..................................................................................................................... 138
Synchronizer Timer .................................................................................................................... 138
Logic Charter GCB Closure ....................................................................................................... 139
Manual Synchronizing .......................................................................................................................... 140
Frequency Setpoint .................................................................................................................... 140
Voltage Setpoint......................................................................................................................... 140
Breaker Close ............................................................................................................................ 141
Reset Frequency / Voltage Setpoints Back To Rated (50 Hz or 60 Hz) .................................... 141

CHAPTER 5. REAL POWER CONTROL DESCRIPTION .............................................................. 142


Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 142
MSLC-2 / DSLC-2 Interface ................................................................................................................. 142
Base Load Mode .................................................................................................................................. 142
Import / Export Mode ............................................................................................................................ 143
Process Control Mode .......................................................................................................................... 143
Remote Control .................................................................................................................................... 143
Automatic Power Transfer Control Functions ...................................................................................... 143
Ramping Between Modes .......................................................................................................... 143
Utility Unload .............................................................................................................................. 143
Local Unload .............................................................................................................................. 144

CHAPTER 6. VAR/POWER FACTOR CONTROL DESCRIPTION ................................................... 145


Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 145
Constant Generator Power Factor ....................................................................................................... 145
Power Factor Control ........................................................................................................................... 146
Var Control ........................................................................................................................................... 146

CHAPTER 7. PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 147


Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 147
Description ........................................................................................................................................... 147

CHAPTER 8. NETWORK / SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 150


Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 150
Description ........................................................................................................................................... 150
Applications Without Segmenting .............................................................................................. 150
Applications With Segmenting ................................................................................................... 151
Not Supported Applications ....................................................................................................... 154
Remote Control by PLC ....................................................................................................................... 155
Interface Connection Via RS-485 With Modbus Protocol .......................................................... 155
Interface Connection Via Ethernet By Modbus/TCP Stack ....................................................... 156

Woodward

Page 5/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

CHAPTER 9. INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 157


Interface Overview ............................................................................................................................... 157
Ethernet Load Sharing ......................................................................................................................... 158
Multi-Master Principle ................................................................................................................ 158
Load Share Monitoring .............................................................................................................. 158
General Load Share Information ............................................................................................... 158
Modbus Communications .................................................................................................................... 159
General Information ................................................................................................................... 159
Address Range .......................................................................................................................... 160
Visualization .............................................................................................................................. 161
Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 162
MSLC-2 Interface Remote Control ............................................................................................ 163
Changing Parameter Settings Via Modus ........................................................................................... 169
Parameter Setting...................................................................................................................... 169
Remotely Resetting The Default Values ................................................................................... 171
Modbus Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 173
Serial Interface 1 ....................................................................................................................... 173
Serial Interface 2 ....................................................................................................................... 173
Network B Modbus ................................................................................................................. 173

APPENDIX A. TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................ 174


Environmental Data ............................................................................................................................. 176
Accuracy .............................................................................................................................................. 177

APPENDIX B. USEFUL INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 178


Connecting 24 V Relays ............................................................................................................ 178

APPENDIX C. DATA PROTOCOLS .......................................................................................... 179


Data Protocol 5200 .............................................................................................................................. 179

APPENDIX D. PARAMETER OVERVIEW .................................................................................. 186


Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 186
Parameter List Columns ............................................................................................................ 186
Parameter List ..................................................................................................................................... 187

APPENDIX E. SERVICE OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 193


Product Service Options ...................................................................................................................... 193
Returning Equipment For Repair ......................................................................................................... 193
Packing A Control ...................................................................................................................... 194
Return Authorization Number RAN ........................................................................................... 194
Replacement Parts .............................................................................................................................. 194
How To Contact Woodward ................................................................................................................. 195
Engineering Services ........................................................................................................................... 196
Technical Assistance ........................................................................................................................... 197

Page 6/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figures and Tables


Figures
Figure 1-2: Multiple generators in isolated operation with tie-breaker ..................................................................................... 15
Figure 1-3: Multiple generators in isolated and utility parallel operation with utility- and tie-breaker ..................................... 16
Figure 2-1: Housing MSLC-2 - dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 2-2: Housing - drill plan ................................................................................................................................................ 20
Figure 2-3: MSLC-2 - terminal arrangement ............................................................................................................................ 21
Figure 2-4: Wiring diagram - MSLC-2 - 1/2 ............................................................................................................................. 22
Figure 2-5: Wiring diagram - MSLC-2 - 2/2 ............................................................................................................................. 23
Figure 2-6: Power supply .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Figure 2-7: Power supply - crank waveform at maximum load ................................................................................................ 25
Figure 2-8: Voltage measuring system A ............................................................................................................................... 26
Figure 2-9: VVoltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 4W OD ....................................................................................... 27
Figure 2-10: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W OD ........................................................................... 27
Figure 2-11: Voltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 4W............................................................................................... 28
Figure 2-12: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W .................................................................................. 28
Figure 2-13: Voltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 3W............................................................................................... 29
Figure 2-14: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W .................................................................................. 29
Figure 2-15: Voltage measuring system B ............................................................................................................................. 30
Figure 2-16: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral) ......................................................... 31
Figure 2-17: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) ........................................................... 32
Figure 2-18: Voltage measuring auxiliary system B .............................................................................................................. 33
Figure 2-19: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B PT windings, 3Ph 4W ........................................................................... 34
Figure 2-20: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W .................................................................... 34
Figure 2-21: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B PT windings, 3Ph 3W ........................................................................... 35
Figure 2-22: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W .................................................................... 35
Figure 2-23: Current measuring system A ............................................................................................................................. 36
Figure 2-24: Current measuring system A, L1 L2 L3 ............................................................................................................ 37
Figure 2-25: Current measuring - system A, phase Lx .............................................................................................................. 37
Figure 2-26: Power measuring - direction of power.................................................................................................................. 38
Figure 2-27: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - positive signal .......................................................................................... 41
Figure 2-28: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - negative signal ......................................................................................... 41
Figure 2-29: Relay outputs ........................................................................................................................................................ 43
Figure 2-30: Analog inputs - wiring two-pole senders using a voltage signal........................................................................... 45
Figure 2-31: Analog inputs - wiring two-pole senders (external jumper used for current signal) ............................................. 45
Figure 2-32: RS-485 interface #1 - overview ............................................................................................................................ 46
Figure 2-33: RS-485 Modbus - connection for half-duplex operation ...................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-34: RS-485 Modbus - connection for full-duplex operation ....................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-35: RS-232 interface - overview ................................................................................................................................. 47
Figure 2-36: RJ-45 interfaces - overview .................................................................................................................................. 47
Figure 3-1: ToolKit - visualization screen ................................................................................................................................ 53
Figure 3-2: ToolKit - analog value trending screen .................................................................................................................. 53
Figure 3-3: ToolKit - configuration screen ............................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 3-4: ToolKit -version page ............................................................................................................................................. 55
Figure 3-5: ToolKit - home page (MSLC-2 configured as utility breaker control) ................................................................... 56
Figure 3-6: ToolKit - home page (MSLC-2 configured as tie-breaker control) ........................................................................ 57
Figure 3-8: ToolKit - home page - MSLC-2 configured as utility breaker control ................................................................... 59
Figure 3-9: ToolKit - home page - MSLC-2 configured as tie-breaker control......................................................................... 60
Figure 3-10: ToolKit - home page - segments........................................................................................................................... 60
Figure 3-11: ToolKit synchronizer ......................................................................................................................................... 61
Figure 3-13: ToolKit load control .......................................................................................................................................... 65
Figure 3-15: ToolKit process control ..................................................................................................................................... 69
Figure 3-17: ToolKit voltage/var/pf control ........................................................................................................................... 71
Figure 3-19: ToolKit configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 75
Figure 3-21: ToolKit interfaces .............................................................................................................................................. 82
Figure 3-23: ToolKit system management ............................................................................................................................. 85
Figure 3-25: ToolKit analog inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 87
Figure 3-26: ToolKit relevant fields for remote load reference input..................................................................................... 88
Figure 3-27: ToolKit relevant fields for remote process reference input................................................................................ 88
Figure 3-28: ToolKit process signal input .............................................................................................................................. 89
Figure 3-29: ToolKit reactive load input................................................................................................................................ 90
Figure 3-31: ToolKit electrical parameters ............................................................................................................................ 92
Woodward

Page 7/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 3-33: ToolKit control status monitor .......................................................................................................................... 95


Figure 3-35: ToolKit discrete inputs / relay outputs............................................................................................................... 98
Figure 3-37: ToolKit diagnostics ......................................................................................................................................... 101
Figure 3-39: ToolKit DSLC-2 overview page ..................................................................................................................... 103
Figure 3-40: ToolKit MSLC-2 overview page ..................................................................................................................... 104
Figure 3-41: Example of an online diagram............................................................................................................................ 106
Figure 3-42: Example of an online diagram with segment numbers and segment connector feedbacks ................................. 107
Figure 3-43: Example of an online diagram with according network ..................................................................................... 108
Figure 3-44: Example of an online diagram with all required information to setup the units ................................................. 109
Figure 3-45: Power measurement ........................................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 4-1: Synchronizer block diagram ................................................................................................................................. 123
Figure 4-2: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral .................................................................................. 124
Figure 4-3: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral .................................................................................. 125
Figure 4-4: Low voltage system 480 V 3-phase with neutral............................................................................................... 126
Figure 4-5: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase ...................................................................................................... 127
Figure 4-6: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase ...................................................................................................... 128
Figure 4-7: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase ...................................................................................................... 129
Figure 4-8: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral .................................................................................. 130
Figure 4-9: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral .................................................................................. 131
Figure 4-10: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................ 132
Figure 4-11: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................ 133
Figure 4-12: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral ................................................................................... 134
Figure 4-13: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral ................................................................................... 135
Figure 4-14: Dead bus closing Example of dead busbar closure arbitration ........................................................................ 136
Figure 4-15: Logic charter CB closure.................................................................................................................................... 139
Figure 7-1: Diagram process control....................................................................................................................................... 149
Figure 8-1: Multiple generators in isolated operation without tie-breakers............................................................................. 151
Figure 8-2: Multiple generators in isolated / parallel to utility operation without tie-breakers ............................................... 151
Figure 8-3: Isolated operation with multiple generator and tie-breaker .................................................................................. 152
Figure 8-4: Isolated / utility parallel operation with multiple generator and tie-breaker ......................................................... 152
Figure 8-5: Isolated / utility parallel operation with multiple generator, tie-breaker and generator group breaker ................. 153
Figure 8-6: Isolated operation with multiple generator and tie-breaker (ring option) ............................................................. 153
Figure 8-7: Not supported application .................................................................................................................................... 154
Figure 8-8: Not supported application .................................................................................................................................... 154
Figure 8-9: Visualization and remote control by PLC via RS-485 interface ........................................................................... 155
Figure 8-10: Visualization and remote control by PLC via Ethernet Modbus/TCP interface ................................................. 156
Figure 9-1: MSLC-2 - interface overview (housing - side view) ............................................................................................ 157
Figure 9-2: Modbus - visualization configurations ................................................................................................................. 161
Figure 9-3: Modbus - sending binary digital orders over interface ......................................................................................... 164
Figure 9-4: Modbus loss of connection ................................................................................................................................ 166
Figure 9-7: Modbus - configuration example 1....................................................................................................................... 169
Figure 9-8: Modbus - configuration example 2....................................................................................................................... 170
Figure 9-9: Modbus - configuration example 3....................................................................................................................... 170
Figure 9-10: Modbus - remote control parameter 1701 .......................................................................................................... 171
Figure 9-11: Modbus - write register - enable the resetting procedure via RS-232 or Modbus TCP/IP.................................. 171
Figure 9-12: Modbus - remote control parameter 1701 .......................................................................................................... 172
Figure 9-13: Modbus - write register - resetting the default values......................................................................................... 172
Figure 9-14: Interference suppressing circuit - connection ..................................................................................................... 178

Page 8/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Tables
Table 1-1: Manual - overview ................................................................................................................................................... 11
Table 2-1: Conversion chart - wire size .................................................................................................................................... 24
Table 2-2: Power supply - terminal assignment ........................................................................................................................ 25
Table 2-3: Voltage measuring terminal assignment system A voltage ................................................................................ 26
Table 2-4: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 4W OD........................................................................ 27
Table 2-5: Voltage measuring terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 4W ............................................................................. 28
Table 2-6: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 3W .............................................................................. 29
Table 2-7: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B voltage................................................................................. 30
Table 2-8: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)...................................................... 31
Table 2-9: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) ....................................................... 32
Table 2-10: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment - auxiliary system B voltage ................................................................ 33
Table 2-11: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment - auxiliary system B, 3Ph 4W .............................................................. 34
Table 2-12: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment - auxiliary system B, 3Ph 3W .............................................................. 35
Table 2-13: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A current ............................................................................... 36
Table 2-14: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A, L1 L2 L3 .......................................................................... 37
Table 2-15: Current measuring - terminal assignment - system A, phase Lx ............................................................................ 37
Table 2-16: Power measuring - terminal assignment ................................................................................................................ 38
Table 2-17: Discrete input - terminal assignment 1/2 ............................................................................................................... 41
Table 2-18: Discrete input - terminal assignment 2/2 ............................................................................................................... 42
Table 2-20: Relay outputs - terminal assignment ...................................................................................................................... 43
Table 2-21: Analog inputs - terminal assignment - wiring two-pole senders ............................................................................ 45
Table 2-22: RS-485 interface #1 - pin assignment .................................................................................................................... 46
Table 2-23: RS-232 interface - pin assignment ......................................................................................................................... 47
Table 2-24: RJ-45 interfaces - pin assignment .......................................................................................................................... 47
Table 3-7: Parameter - homepage ............................................................................................................................................. 58
Table 3-12: Parameter synchronizer....................................................................................................................................... 64
Table 3-14: Parameter load control ........................................................................................................................................ 68
Table 3-16: Parameter process control ................................................................................................................................... 70
Table 3-18: Parameter voltage/var/pf control......................................................................................................................... 74
Table 3-20: Parameter configuration...................................................................................................................................... 81
Table 3-22: Parameter configuration interfaces .................................................................................................................. 84
Table 3-24: Parameter configuration system management.................................................................................................. 87
Table 3-30: Parameter analog inputs ...................................................................................................................................... 91
Table 3-32: Parameter electrical parameters .......................................................................................................................... 94
Table 3-34: Parameter control status monitor ........................................................................................................................ 97
Table 3-36: Parameter discrete inputs / outputs ................................................................................................................... 100
Table 3-38: Parameter diagnostics ....................................................................................................................................... 102
Table 3-29: Parameter DSLC-2 overview page ................................................................................................................... 103
Table 3-30: Parameter MSLC-2 overview page ................................................................................................................... 104
Table 4-1: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................... 124
Table 4-2: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................... 125
Table 4-3: Low voltage system 480 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................................ 126
Table 4-4: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase ....................................................................................................... 127
Table 4-5: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase ....................................................................................................... 128
Table 4-6: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase ....................................................................................................... 129
Table 4-7: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................... 130
Table 4-8: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................... 131
Table 4-9: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................... 132
Table 4-10: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral ................................................................................. 133
Table 4-11: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral ..................................................................................... 134
Table 4-12: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral ..................................................................................... 135
Table 9-1: MSLC-2 - Interfaces - overview ............................................................................................................................ 157
Table 9-2: Modbus - address range ......................................................................................................................................... 160
Table 9-3: Modbus - address range block read........................................................................................................................ 161
Table 9-4: Modbus - address calculation ................................................................................................................................ 162
Table 9-5: Modbus - data types ............................................................................................................................................... 162
Table 9-6: Modbus sending setpoint sover interface ............................................................................................................ 163
Table 9-7: Modbus sending binary digital orders over interface .......................................................................................... 164
Table 9-8: Modbus sending binary digital orders over interface .......................................................................................... 165
Figure 9-5: Modbus - configuration example 1 - active power ............................................................................................... 167
Figure 9-6: Modbus - configuration example 2 power factor ............................................................................................... 168
Table 9-9: Modbus password for serial interface 1 .............................................................................................................. 169
Table 9-10: Modbus generator rated voltage........................................................................................................................ 170
Table 9-11: Modbus generator voltage measuring ............................................................................................................... 170
Table 9-12: Modbus reset default values.............................................................................................................................. 171
Woodward

Page 9/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Table 9-13: Modbus - serial interface 1 - parameters.............................................................................................................. 173


Table 9-14: Modbus - serial interface 2 parameters ............................................................................................................. 173
Table 9-15: Modbus - TCP/IP Network B parameters .......................................................................................................... 173
Table 9-16: Interference suppressing circuit for relays ........................................................................................................... 178

Page 10/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 1.
General Information
Document Overview

This manual describes the Woodward MSLC-2TM Master Synchronizer and Load Control.
Type
MSLC-2
DSLC-2 User Manual
MSLC-2 User Manual

this manual

English

German

37443
37444

Table 1-1: Manual - overview

Intended Use The unit must only be operated in the manner described by this manual. The prerequisite for a
proper and safe operation of the product is correct transportation, storage and installation as well as careful operation and maintenance.

NOTE
This manual has been developed for a unit fitted with all available options. Inputs/outputs, functions,
configuration screens and other details described, which do not exist on your unit, may be ignored.
The present manual has been prepared to enable the installation and commissioning of the unit. Due to
the large variety of parameter settings, it is not possible to cover every combination. The manual is
therefore only a guide.

Woodward

Page 11/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Application

The Woodward MSLC-2 control is the direct successor of the former MSLC master synchronizer and load
control. The MSLC-2 is a microprocessor-based overall plant load control designed for use in a system with
Woodward DSLC-2TM (Digital Synchronizer and Load Control) controls on each generator to provide utility
synchronizing, paralleling, loading and unloading of a three-phase generating system.
Applications allow up to 32 generators to be paralleled and controlled in conjunction with up to 16 MSLC-2. A
dedicated Ethernet system provides seamless communications between DSLC-2TM and MSLC-2TM units. A
second Ethernet port is provided for customer remote control and monitoring capability using Modbus TCP allowing DCS and PLC interfacing. Additionally a Modbus RTU is available through a separate RS-485 port.

MSLC-2 function summary


Original MSLC functions include:
Selectable for phase matching or slip frequency synchronizing between the utility and a local bus with
voltage matching
Automatic system loading and unloading for bumpless load transfer
Import/export level control capability
Process control for cogeneration, pressure, maintenance or other process
Proportional loading of associated DSLC-2 controls in isochronous load sharing
Adjustable power factor control
Built in diagnostics with relay output
Multifunction adjustable high and low limit alarms and adjustable load switches with relay outputs
Digital communications network to provide loading and power factor control of individual DSLC-2
equipped generators
Additional MSLC-2 functions include:
Automatic dead bus closure capability for tie-breakers
Multiple utility breaker and tie-breaker MSLC-2s on the same bus segment
One dedicated Ethernet line for precise system communications between all DSLC-2s and MSLC-2s on
the system
Ethernet Modbus/TCP for remote control and monitoring
Serial Modbus RS-485 for remote control and monitoring
Applications with up to 32 DSLC-2 and 16 MSLC-2
Automatic segment control (self recognizing of the segment)
Full setup, metering and diagnostic capability through the PC program ToolKit

Synchronizer

Either phase matching or slip frequency synchronizing may be selected. Phase matching provides rapid synchronizing for critical standby power applications. Slip frequency synchronizing ensures that the initial flow of power
will be either out of the local system (export) or into the local system (import), depending on whether a positive
or negative slip is chosen. For both synchronizing methods, the MSLC-2 uses actual slip frequency and breaker
delay values to anticipate an adjustable minimum phase difference between the utility and the local bus. Additional synchronizer functions include voltage matching, time delayed automatic multi-shot reclosing, autoresynchronizing and a synchronizer timeout alarm. Each of these features may be enabled or disabled during setup.

Page 12/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

The MSLC-2 control provides a safe automatic dead bus closure function. Deadbus closing permission is granted
to only one DSLC-2 or MSLC-2 control in the whole system through locking techniques done over the communications network.
The MSLC-2, configured as tie-breaker control, allows selecting different closure modes or all modes:
Alive bus A -> dead bus B
Dead bus A -> dead bus B
Alive bus B -> dead bus A

Load Control

The MSLC-2 has 4 load control modes available:


Base load
Import/export
Process
Utility unload
Load control begins with the breaker closure of the utility and another discrete input selecting the load control
mode wanted. If no load control mode is selected the MSLC-2 will be in the offline mode. The system load immediately prior to breaker closure is used as the starting base load reference. On command, the adjustable ramp
allows smooth, timecontrolled loading into a set import/export level. A ramp pause switch is provided to stop the
ramp at any point.
The import/export control is an integrating control. It adjusts the percentage of rated load carried by the individual generators, operating in isochronous load sharing, in order to maintain a set import/export or base load level.
The MSLC-2 will maintain a constant base load or import/export level even with changing utility frequencies.
The MSLC-2 provides switch inputs to allow raising or lowering the internal digital base load or import/export
reference. The control also provides a remote analog signal input for reference setting, if desired. (signal variety:
0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V and 0 to 10V)
The MSLC-2 is equipped with a utility unload switch, which provides an adjustable time controlled ramp to lower the base load or import/export level. When the level is below an adjustable threshold, the MSLC-2 issues a
breaker open command to separate the utility from the local bus. The ramp pause switch can be used to stop the
utility unload at any point. The maximum load that the MSLC-2 can tell the individual generators to carry is their
rated loads. So, in the event that the plant load is greater than the capacity of the operating generators, the utility
unload will stop when 100% rated load is reached on each of the operating generators. This prevents accidental
overloading of the local generators.
The MSLC-2 also includes two adjustable load switches which can be used for external functions or warnings
when chosen system load levels are attained. The high and low limit switches may also be activated when 100%
or 0% load signal to the generators is reached.

Woodward

Page 13/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Process Control

A process controller is provided for cogeneration, fluid level maintenance, pressure control or other applications.
An adjustable bandwidth signal input filter, flexible PID controller adjustments, selectable for direct or indirect
action, allow the process control to be used in a wide variety of applications.
An analog signal input (signal variety: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V and 0 to 10V) provides the
process signal to the MSLC-2. The MSLC-2 includes an internal digital process reference which may be controlled by the raise and lower switch contact inputs or by an external analog input signal as remote process reference. The MSLC-2 also has a Modbus address for process reference control. The output of the process control,
like the import/export control, is the percentage of rated load setpoint to the individual generators in isochronous
load sharing.
An adjustable ramp allows smooth entry and exit from the process control mode. When the process control mode
is selected, the load reference is ramped in a direction to reduce the error between the process input and the
process reference. When the error is minimized or the reference first reaches either the high or low specified limits, the process controllers PID loop is activated. When the load reference output reaches either 100% or 0%, the
control will maintain that load reference until process control is established. The MSLC-2 is not capable of overloading or reverse powering the generators in an attempt to meet the process reference. The high and low limit
switches mentioned above can be used to indicate that either too many or too few generators are online to maintain the process within its limits.

Var/PF Control

The var/PF function controls the power factor on all of the DSLC-2 equipped machines operating in isochronous
load sharing. The PF control begins on breaker closure. The MSLC-2 has three modes of Var/PF control (which
are selected in Menu 4):

Constant generator power factor sets the power factor reference on all of the DSLC-2 controls to the
internal reference chosen in the MSLC-2. The power factor can then be adjusted using the voltage raise
and lower inputs. The voltage raise command will make the power factor more lagging. Conversely, the
voltage lower command will make the power factor more leading.
Utility tie power factor control adjusts the power factor reference on all of the DSLC-2 controls in
isochronous load sharing in order to maintain the power factor across the utility tie.
Utility tie var control adjusts the power factor reference on all of the DSLC-2 controls in isochronous
load sharing in order to maintain the level of vars being imported or exported from the utility.

The var/PF control mode begins with the load control mode selected. The constant generator power factor and the
utility tie power factor control can have the reference setting controlled by an analog input (see Menu 6). By closing the voltage raise and lower discrete inputs you can select the analog remote input for reference control.

Page 14/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 Systems

The network addressing of the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 allows up to 32 DSLC-2s and 16 MSLC-2s in an application.
A DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 application can handle 8 segments. Discrete inputs inform the DSLC-2s and MSLC-2s
which segments each generator and utilities are operating on. If a MSLC-2 receives a discrete input to activate
segment 1 and 2, it will share this information with all controls over the Ethernet bus. It is not necessary to provide a segment activation discrete input to all controls. Segmenting allows the DSLC-2s and MSLC-2s to remain
connected thru the Ethernet bus, but be operating on separate load buses.
The DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system can be applied according to following rules:
The maximum number of DSLC-2s (Gen-CB) is 32.
The maximum number of MSLC-2s (Utility- or Tie-CB) is 16.
The maximum number of segments is 8.
The segment numbers have to follow a line, which can finally be closed to a ring.
Only one MSLC-2 can be used as master control, when multiple MSLC-2 are resided in one segment.
o The MSLC-2 with the lower device number will control if multiple Utility MSLC-2s are active
on the same segment
The generator is not counted as a segment.
The utility is not counted as a segment.

NOTE
If different MSLC-2s, located in different segments, are connected via a tie-MSLC-2, more than one
MSLC-2 is now located in the same segment. The result is the MSLC-2 with the lowest device number
becomes the master of all MSLC-2s located in this segment.

Examples:

Figure 1-2: Multiple generators in isolated operation with tie-breaker

Woodward

Page 15/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 1-3: Multiple generators in isolated and utility parallel operation with utility- and tie-breaker

Page 16/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 2.
Installation
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is static-sensitive, some components more than others. To protect these components
from static damage, you must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.
Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the static electricity on your body to ground by
touching and holding a grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing made of synthetic materials. Wear
cotton or cotton-blend materials as much as possible because these do not store static electric charges as
easily as synthetics.
Keep plastic, vinyl and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam cups, cigarette packages, cellophane
wrappers, vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, etc.) away from the control, modules and work area as
much as possible.
Opening the control cover may void the unit warranty.
Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet unless absolutely necessary. If you
must remove the PCB from the control cabinet, follow these precautions:
Ensure that the device is completely voltage-free (all connectors have to be disconnected).
Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
Do not touch the electrical conductors, connectors, or components with conductive devices or with
bare hands.
When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic protective bag it comes in until you
are ready to install it. Immediately after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet, place it in the
antistatic protective bag.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed
Circuit Boards and Modules.

NOTE
The unit is capable to withstand an electrostatic powder coating process with a voltage of up to 85 kV
and a current of up to 40 A.

Woodward

Page 17/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Unpacking

Before unpacking the control, refer to the inside front cover of this manual for WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. Be
careful when unpacking the control. Check for signs of damage such as bent or dented panels, scratches, loose or
broken parts. If any damage is found, immediately notify the shipper.

Location

When selecting a location for mounting the MSLC-2 control, consider the following:
Protect the unit from direct exposure to water or to a condensation-prone environment.
The continuous operating range of the MSLC-2 control is 40 to +70 C (40 to +158 F).
Provide adequate ventilation for cooling. Shield the unit from radiant heat sources.
Do not install near high-voltage, high-current devices.
Allow adequate space in front of the unit for servicing.
Do not install where objects can be dropped on the terminals.
Ground the chassis for proper safety and shielding.
The control must NOT be mounted on the engine.

Page 18/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Housing

Dimensions

Protective Earth

Figure 2-1: Housing MSLC-2 - dimensions

Woodward

Page 19/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Installation
The unit is to be mounted to the switch cabinet back using four screws with a maximum diameter of 6 mm. Drill
the holes according to the dimensions in Figure 2-2 (dimensions shown in mm).

Figure 2-2: Housing - drill plan

Page 20/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Terminal Arrangement
NOTE
The Protective Earth terminal 61 is not connected on the MSLC-2. The protective earth connection at
the sheet metal housing must be used instead (refer to Figure 1-2).

Figure 2-3: MSLC-2 - terminal arrangement

Woodward

Page 21/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Wiring Diagrams

Figure 2-4: Wiring diagram - MSLC-2 - 1/2


Page 22/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 2-5: Wiring diagram - MSLC-2 - 2/2

Woodward

Page 23/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Connections

WARNING
All technical data and ratings indicated in this chapter are not definite! Only the values indicated in paragraph Appendix A. Technical Data on page 174 are valid!

The following chart may be used to convert square millimeters [mm] to AWG and vice versa:
AWG
30
28
26
24
22

mm
0.05
0.08
0.14
0.25
0.34

AWG
21
20
18
17
16

mm
0.38
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5

AWG
14
12
10
8
6

mm
2.5
4
6
10
16

AWG
4
2
1
1/0
2/0

mm
25
35
50
55
70

AWG
3/0
4/0
300MCM
350MCM
500MCM

mm
95
120
150
185
240

AWG
600MCM
750MCM
1000MCM

mm
300
400
500

Table 2-1: Conversion chart - wire size

Page 24/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Power Supply
WARNING Protective Earth
Protective Earth (PE) must be connected to the unit to avoid the risk of electric shock. The conductor
providing the connection must have a wire larger than or equal to 2.5 mm (14 AWG). The connection
must be performed properly.
Please use the protective earth connection at the sheet metal housing (refer to Figure 2-1 on page 19).

Figure 2-6: Power supply


Figure
A
B

Terminal
63
64

Description
12/24Vdc (8 to 40.0 Vdc)
0 Vdc

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
Table 2-2: Power supply - terminal assignment

Figure 2-7: Power supply - crank waveform at maximum load

NOTE
Woodward recommends to use one of the following slow-acting protective devices in the supply line to
terminal 63:
Fuse NEOZED D01 6A or equivalent
or
Miniature Circuit Breaker 6A / Type C (for example: ABB type: S271C6 or equivalent)

Woodward

Page 25/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring
NOTE
DO NOT use both sets of voltage measuring inputs. The control unit will not measure voltage correctly
if the 120 V and 480 V inputs are utilized simultaneously.

NOTE
Woodward recommends protecting the voltage measuring inputs with slow-acting fuses rated for 2 to
6 A.

Voltage Measuring: System A

Figure 2-8: Voltage measuring system A


Figure
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Terminal
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Description
System A Voltage A (L1)
System A Voltage B (L2)
System A Voltage C (L3)
System A Voltage N

120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm

Table 2-3: Voltage measuring terminal assignment system A voltage

NOTE
If parameter 1800 ("System A PT secondary rated volt.") is configured with a value between 50 and
130 V, the 120 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.
If parameter 1800 ("System A PT secondary rated volt.") is configured with a value between 131 and
480 V, the 480 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.

Page 26/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: System A


Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W OD' (3-phase, 4-wire, Open delta)
A generator system that is connected to the load through a 3-phase, 4-wire connection but have the device wired
for a 3-phase, 3-wire installation may have the L2 phase grounded on the secondary side. In this application the
device will be configured for 3-phase, 4-wire open delta for correct power measurement.

Figure 2-9: VVoltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 4W OD

Figure 2-10: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W OD


3Ph 4W OD
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
E
G
B
D
F
H
MSLC-2 terminal
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
36
Phase L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
--L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
---

Note
1

Table 2-4: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 4W OD

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used.

Woodward

Page 27/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W' (3-phase, 4-wire)


A

L1

L1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A5

A6

N
C2
C1

C6

N B6

C5

B2
B1

B5
B2

C2

B1

C1

L2

L2

L3

L3
A

L1

A1

A5

A2

A6

N
C2

B6
B5

C1
C6

B2

C5

B1

L2
N
L3

Figure 2-11: Voltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 4W

Figure 2-12: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W


3Ph 4W
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
E
G
B
D
F
H
MSLC-2 terminal
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
36
Phase L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
N
L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
N

Note
2

Table 2-5: Voltage measuring terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 4W

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used. Incorrect measurements are possible if both voltage systems use
the same N terminal.

Page 28/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting '3Ph 3W' (3-phase, 3-wire)


A

L1

L1

A
C6

A1

C5

C2

A2

A1

C1

A2
C2

A5

C1

C
B2

L2

B1

A6

C
B6

B5

B2

L2

B1

L3

L3

Figure 2-13: Voltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 3W

Figure 2-14: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W


3Ph 3W
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
E
G
B
D
F
H
MSCL-2 terminal
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
36
Phase L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
--L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
---

Note
3

Table 2-6: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 3W

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used.

Woodward

Page 29/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: System B

Figure 2-15: Voltage measuring system B


Figure
A
B
C
D

Terminal
37
38
39
40

Description
System B Voltage A (L1)
System B Voltage B (L2) | N

120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm

Table 2-7: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B voltage

NOTE
If parameter 1803 ("System B PT secondary rated voltage") is configured with a value between 50 and
130 V, the 120 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.
If parameter 1803 ("System B PT secondary rated voltage") is configured with a value between 131 and
480 V, the 480 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.

Page 30/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: System B, Parameter Setting '1Ph 2W' (1-phase, 2-wire)

NOTE
The 1-phase, 2-wire measurement may be performed phase-neutral or phase-phase. Please note to
configure and wire the MSLC-2 consistently. Refer to the chapter Configuration & Operation.

'1Ph 2W' Phase-Neutral Measuring

Figure 2-16: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)


1Ph 2W
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
----B
D
----MSLC-2 terminal
37
39
----38
40
----Phase L1 / A
N
----L1 / A
N
-----

Note
4

Table 2-8: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used. Incorrect measurements are possible if both voltage systems use
the same N terminal.

Woodward

Page 31/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

'1Ph 2W' Phase-Phase Measuring

Figure 2-17: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)


1Ph 2W
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
----B
D
----MSLC-2 terminal
37
39
----38
40
----Phase L1 / A L2 / B
----L1 / A L2 / B
-----

Note
5

Table 2-9: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used. Incorrect measurements are possible if both voltage systems use
the same N terminal.

Page 32/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: Auxiliary System B

Figure 2-18: Voltage measuring auxiliary system B


Figure
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Terminal
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Description
Auxiliary System B Voltage A (L1)
Auxiliary System B Voltage B (L2)
Auxiliary System B Voltage C (L3)
Auxiliary System B Voltage N

120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac
120 Vac
480 Vac

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm

Table 2-10: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment - auxiliary system B voltage

NOTE
If parameter 1803 ("System B PT secondary rated voltage") is configured with a value between 50 and
130 V, the 120 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.
If parameter 1803 ("System B PT secondary rated voltage") is configured with a value between 131 and
480 V, the 480 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.

NOTE
If the MSLC-2 is intended to be operated in parallel with the mains, the mains voltage measuring inputs
must be connected. If an external mains decoupling is performed, jumpers between system B and auxiliary system B voltage measuring inputs may be installed.

Woodward

Page 33/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: Auxiliary System B, Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W' (3-phase, 4-wire)
A

L1

L1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A5

A6

N
C2
C1

C6

N B6

C5

B2
B1

B5
B2

C2

B1

C1

L2

L2

L3

L3
A

L1

A1

A5

A2

A6

N
C2

B6
B5

C1
C6

B2

C5

B1

L2
N
L3

Figure 2-19: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B PT windings, 3Ph 4W

Figure 2-20: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W


3Ph 4W
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
E
G
B
D
F
H
MSLC-2 terminal
21
23
25
27
22
24
26
28
Phase L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
N
L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
N

Note
6

Table 2-11: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment - auxiliary system B, 3Ph 4W

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used. Incorrect measurements are possible if both voltage systems use
the same N terminal.

Page 34/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Measuring: Auxiliary System B, Parameter Setting '3Ph 3W' (3-phase, 3-wire)
A

L1

L1

A
C6

A1

C5

C2

A2

A1

C1

A2
C2

A5

C1

C
B2

L2

B1

A6

C
B6

B5

B2

L2

B1

L3

L3

Figure 2-21: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B PT windings, 3Ph 3W

Figure 2-22: Voltage measuring - auxiliary system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W


3Ph 3W
Wiring terminals
Rated voltage (range)
[1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.)
[4] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
Measuring range (max.)
[1] 0 to 150 Vac
[4] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure
A
C
E
G
B
D
F
H
MSLC-2 terminal
21
23
25
27
22
24
26
28
Phase L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
--L1 / A L2 / B L3 / C
---

Note
7

Table 2-12: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment - auxiliary system B, 3Ph 3W

For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used.

Woodward

Page 35/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Current Measuring
CAUTION
Before disconnecting the device, ensure that the current transformer/CT is short-circuited.

System A Current
NOTE
Generally, one line of the current transformers secondary is to be grounded close to the CT.

Figure 2-23: Current measuring system A


Figure
A
B
C
D
E
F

Terminal
8
7
6
5
4
3

Description
System A current C (L3) X1
System A current C (L3) X2
System A current B (L2) X1
System A current B (L2) X2
System A current A (L1) X1
System A current A (L1) X2

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm

Table 2-13: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A current

Page 36/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Current Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting 'L1 L2 L3'

Figure 2-24: Current measuring system A, L1 L2 L3


L1 L2 L3
MSLC-2 terminal
Phase

3
X2 - A(L1)

4
X1 - A(L1)

Wiring terminals
5
6
X2 - B(L2) X1 - B(L2)

Notes
7
X2 - C(L3)

8
X1 - C(L3)

Table 2-14: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A, L1 L2 L3

Current Measuring: Generator, Parameter Setting 'Phase L1', 'Phase L2' & 'Phase L3'

Phase L1

Phase L2

Phase L3
Figure 2-25: Current measuring - system A, phase Lx

Wiring terminals
Phase L1
MSLC-2 terminal
Phase
Phase L2
MSLC-2 terminal
Phase
Phase L3
MSLC-2 terminal
Phase

Notes

3
X2 - A(L1)

4
X1 - A(L1)

5
---

6
---

7
---

8
---

3
---

4
---

5
X2 - B(L2)

6
X1 - B(L2)

7
---

8
---

3
---

4
---

5
---

6
---

7
X2 - C(L3)

8
X1 - C(L3)

Table 2-15: Current measuring - terminal assignment - system A, phase Lx

Woodward

Page 37/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Power Measuring
If the unit's current transformers are wired according to the diagram shown, the following values are displayed.
Utility Breaker MSLC-2
Parameter
Mains real power

Mains real power


Mains power factor (cos )
Mains power factor (cos )
Tie-Breaker MSLC-2
Parameter
System A real power
System A real power
System A power factor (cos )
System A power factor (cos )

Description
Importing Kw (from Utility)
Powerflow from System A to
System B
Exporting Kw (to Utility)
Powerflow from System A to
System B
Inductive / lagging
Capacitive / leading

Sign displayed
+ Positive KW

Description
Powerflow from System A to
System B in kW
Powerflow from System A to
System B in kW
Inductive / lagging reactivepowerflow from System A to
System B
Capacitive / leading reactivepowerflow from System A
to System B

Sign displayed
+ Positive

- Negative KW

+ Positive
- Negative

- Negative
+ Positive

- Negative

Figure 2-26: Power measuring - direction of power


Figure
A
B

Terminal
3
4

Description
X2 A (L1) System A Current
X1 A (L1) System A Current

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
Table 2-16: Power measuring - terminal assignment

Page 38/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Power Factor Definition


The phasor diagram is used from the generator's view. Power factor is defined as follows.
Power Factor is defined as a ratio of the real power to apparent power. In a purely resistive circuit, the voltage
and current waveforms are instep resulting in a ratio or power factor of 1.00 (often referred to as unity). In an inductive circuit the current lags behind the voltage waveform resulting in usable power (real power) and unusable
power (reactive power). This results in a positive ratio or lagging power factor (i.e. 0.85lagging). In a capacitive
circuit the current waveform leads the voltage waveform resulting in usable power (real power) and unusable
power (reactive power). This results in a negative ratio or a leading power factor (i.e. 0.85leading).
Inductive: Electrical load whose current waveform
lags the voltage waveform thus having a lagging power factor. Some inductive loads such as electric motors
have a large startup current requirement resulting in
lagging power factors.

Capacitive: Electrical load whose current waveform


leads the voltage waveform thus having a leading
power factor. Some capacitive loads such as capacitor
banks or buried cable result in leading power factors.

Different power factor displays at the unit:


i0.91 (inductive)
lg.91 (lagging)

c0.93 (capacitive)
ld.93 (leading)

Reactive power display at the unit:


70 kvar (positive)

-60 kvar (negative)

Output at the interface:


+ (positive)

- (negative)

In relation to the voltage, the current is


lagging

leading

The generator is
over excited

under excited

Control: If the control unit is equipped with a power factor controller while in parallel with the utility:
A voltage lower "-" signal is output as long as the
measured value is "more inductive" than the reference
setpoint
Example: measured = i0.91; setpoint = i0.95

Woodward

A voltage raise "+" signal is output as long as the


measured value is "more capacitive" than the reference setpoint
Example: measured = c0.91; setpoint = c0.95

Page 39/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Phasor diagram:
inductive

Page 40/198

capacitive

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Discrete Inputs
Discrete Inputs: Signal Polarity
The discrete inputs are electrically isolated which permits the polarity of the connections to be either positive or
negative.

NOTE
All discrete inputs must use the same polarity, either positive or negative signals, due to the common
ground.

Discrete Inputs: Positive Polarity Signal

Figure 2-27: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - positive signal

Discrete Inputs: Negative Polarity Signal

Figure 2-28: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - negative signal


Terminal
Term.
Com.
A

Description

Amax

B
67

Discrete input [DI 01]

{all}

Check

2.5 mm

68

Discrete input [DI 02]

{all}

Permissive

2.5 mm

69

Discrete input [DI 03]

{all}

Run

2.5 mm

70

Discrete input [DI 04]

{all}

CB Aux

2.5 mm

66

71

Discrete input [DI 05]

{all}

Voltage Raise

2.5 mm

GND
common
ground

72

Discrete input [DI 06]

{all}

Voltage Lower

2.5 mm

73

Discrete input [DI 07]

{all}

Base Load

2.5 mm

74

Discrete input [DI 08]

{all}

Utility Unload

2.5 mm

75

Discrete input [DI 09]

{all}

Ramp Pause

2.5 mm

76

Discrete input [DI 10]

{all}

Setpoint Raise

2.5 mm

77

Discrete input [DI 11]

{all}

Setpoint Lower

2.5 mm

78

Discrete input [DI 12]

{all}

Process Control

2.5 mm

Table 2-17: Discrete input - terminal assignment 1/2

Woodward

Page 41/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


Terminal
Term.
Com.
A

152
GND
common
ground

Description

Amax

B
141

Discrete input [DI 13]

{all}

Segment No. 12 Act.

2.5 mm

142

Discrete input [DI 14]

{all}

Segment No. 23 Act.

2.5 mm

143

Discrete input [DI 15]

{all}

Segment No. 34 Act.

2.5 mm

144

Discrete input [DI 16]

{all}

Segment No. 45 Act.

2.5 mm

145

Discrete input [DI 17]

{all}

Segment No. 56 Act.

2.5 mm

146

Discrete input [DI 18]

{all}

Segment No. 67 Act.

2.5 mm

147

Discrete input [DI 19]

{all}

Segment No. 78 Act.

2.5 mm

148

Discrete input [DI 20]

{all}

Segment No. 81 Act.

2.5 mm

149

Discrete input [DI 21]

{all}

Imp./Exp. Control

2.5 mm

150

Discrete input [DI 22]

{all}

Modbus Reset

2.5 mm

151

Discrete input [DI 23]

{all}

Reserved

2.5 mm

Table 2-18: Discrete input - terminal assignment 2/2

Off Line
Base Load
Base Load Raise
Base Load Lower
Base Load 1
Remote
Utility Unload 2
Local Unload 3
Ramp Pause 4
Import/
Export mode
I/E Raise
I/E Lower
I/E Remote 1
Process Control
Process Raise
Process Lower
Process Remote 1

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

CB AUX

Utility
Unload

Base Load

Imp/Exp
Control

Process
Control

Ramp Pause

Setpoint
Raise

Setpoint
Lower

0
1
1
1
1

x
0
0
0
0

x
1
1
1
1

x
0
0
0
0

x
0
0
0
0

x
0
0
0
0

x
0
1
0
1

x
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
0
x
0

x
1
x
x

x
0
x
1

x
0
x
0

0
0
1
0

x
0
x
0

x
1
x
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

1
1
1
x
x
x
x

0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Table 2-19: Load control modes MSLC-2

Remote reference is activated by closing both setpoint raise and setpoint lower switches at the same time.

The MSLC-2 can only load the associated generators to 100%. If this is not enough capacity to unload the utility, the unload ramps stops at
100% rated load on the associated generators. The generator high limit alarm, if enabled, will activate at this time.

The local plant unload is accomplished by switching to base load mode and supplying a continuous setpoint lower command.

The ramp pause command will pause all ramps in any mode.

Page 42/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Relay Outputs

Figure 2-29: Relay outputs


Terminal
Term. Com.
A
42
43
44
45
48
50
52
54
56
57
58
59

B
41
46
47
49
51
53
55
60

Description

Form A, N.O. make contact


Relay output [R 01]
{all}
Relay output [R 02]
{all}
Relay output [R 03]
{all}
Relay output [R 04]
{all}
Relay output [R 05]
{all}
Relay output [R 06]
{all}
Relay output [R 07]
{all}
Relay output [R 08]
{all}
Relay output [R 09]
{all}
Relay output [R 10]
{all}
Relay output [R 11]
{all}
Relay output [R 12]
{all}

Amax

Alarm (Self Test OK)


Reserve
High Limit
Low Limit
Breaker Open
Breaker Close
Lcl./Gen. Breaker Open
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Load Switch 1
Load Switch 2

Type
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.

2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm

N.O.-normally open (make) contact

Table 2-20: Relay outputs - terminal assignment

Woodward

Page 43/198

Manual 37444A

Self Test
Reserve
High load limit
High process limit
High voltage limit
Low load limit
Low process limit
Low voltage limit
Utility Unload (DI
8)
Synchronizationdead bus closure
Local Generator
Breaker open (DI
11)
Synchronizer
timeout
Reclose limit
High load limit
Low load limit
High process limit
Low process limit
Low voltage limit,
High voltage limit
Voltage range limit
Communication
error
Missing member
Centralized alarm
CB open fail
Load switch 1
Load switch 2

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

DO

Alarm

Reserve

High
Limit

Low
Limit

Breaker
Open

Breaker
Close

LCL/
Gen
Breaker
Open

Alarm 1

Alarm 2

Alarm 3

Load
switch 1

Load
switch 2

x
x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x

NOTE
Refer to Appendix B: Connecting 24 V Relays on page 178 for interference suppressing circuits when
connecting 24 V relays.

Page 44/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Analog Inputs
The following senders may be used for the analog inputs:
0 to 20mA
4 to 20mA
0 to 10V
0 to 5V
1 to 5V

Wiring Examples

Figure 2-30: Analog inputs - wiring two-pole senders using a voltage signal

Figure 2-31: Analog inputs - wiring two-pole senders (external jumper used for current signal)
Figure
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C

Terminal
83
84
85 +
86
87
88 +
89
90
91 +

Description
Analog input [AI 01]
Remote Load Reference Input
Analog input [AI 02]
Process Signal Input
Analog input [AI 03]
Reactive Load Input

Amax
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.5 mm

Table 2-21: Analog inputs - terminal assignment - wiring two-pole senders

Woodward

Page 45/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Interfaces
RS-485 Serial Interface (Serial Interface #2)

Figure 2-32: RS-485 interface #1 - overview


Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Description
not connected
B (TxD+)
not connected
B' (RxD+)
not connected
not connected
A (TxD-)
not connected
A' (RxD-)

Amax
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 2-22: RS-485 interface #1 - pin assignment

Half-Duplex with Modbus on RS-485

Figure 2-33: RS-485 Modbus - connection for half-duplex operation

Full-Duplex with Modbus on RS-485

Figure 2-34: RS-485 Modbus - connection for full-duplex operation

NOTE
Please note that the MSLC-2 must be configured for half- or full-duplex configuration (parameter 3173).

Page 46/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

RS-232 Serial Interface (Serial Interface #1)

Figure 2-35: RS-232 interface - overview


Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Description
not connected
RxD (receive data)
TxD (transmit data)
not connected
GND (system ground)
not connected
RTS (request to send)
CTS (clear to send)
not connected

Amax
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 2-23: RS-232 interface - pin assignment

RJ-45 Ethernet Interfaces (Network A, Network B)

Figure 2-36: RJ-45 interfaces - overview


Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Description
Tx+
TxRx+
not connected
not connected
Rxnot connected
not connected

Amax
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 2-24: RJ-45 interfaces - pin assignment

Woodward

Page 47/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 3.
Configuration & Operation
Configuration Via PC

Install ToolKit Configuration and Visualization Software


NOTE
Woodwards ToolKit software is required to configure the unit via PC.

ToolKit Version 3.6.0 or higher

Install ToolKit Software


1.
2.
3.

Please insert the enclosed Product CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer
The CD is going to start automatically (autostart function needs to be activated)
Please go to the section Software and follow the instructions described there

Alternatively ToolKit can be downloaded from our Website. Please proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Go to http://www.woodward.com/software
Select ToolKit in the list and click the Go button
Click More Info to get further information about ToolKit
Choose the preferred software version and click Download
Now you need to login with your e-mail address or register first
The download will start immediatly

Minimum system requirements for ToolKit:

Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, XP (32- & 64-bit)


Microsoft .NET Framework Ver. 3.5
600 MHz Pentium CPU
96 MB of RAM
Minimum 800 by 600 pixel screen with 256 colors
Serial Port
CD-ROM drive

NOTE
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 must be installed on your computer to be able to install ToolKit. If not already installed, Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 will be installed automatically. You must be connected
to the internet for this. Alternatively you can use the .NET Framework 3.5 installer which can be found
on the Product CD.
Page 48/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Install ToolKit Configuration Files


1.
2.
3.

Please insert the enclosed Product CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer
The CD is going to start automatically (autostart function needs to be activated)
Please go to the section Configuration Files and follow the instructions described there

Alternatively ToolKit configuration files can be downloaded from our Website. Please proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Go to http://www.woodward.com/software/configfiles/
Please insert the part number (P/N) and revision of your device into the corresponding fields
Select ToolKit in the application type list
Click Search

NOTE
ToolKit is using the following files:
*.WTOOL
1
2
File name composition: [P/N1]* -[Revision]_[Language ID]_[P/N2]* -[Revision]_[# of visualized
gens].WTOOL
Example file name:
8440-1234-NEW_US_5418-1234-NEW.WTOOL
Content of the file:
Display screens and pages for online configuration, which are associated with
the respective *.SID file
*.SID
2
File name composition: [P/N2]* -[Revision].SID
Example file name:
5418-1234-NEW.SID
Content of the file:
All display and configuration parameters available in ToolKit
*.WSET
File name composition: [user defined].WSET
Example file name:
easYgen_settings.WSET
Content of the file:
Default settings of the ToolKit configuration parameters provided by the SID
file or user-defined settings read out of the unit.
1

* P/N1 = Part number of the unit


2
* P/N2 = Part number of the software in the unit

Woodward

Page 49/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Starting ToolKit Software


1.
2.

Start ToolKit via Windows Start menu -> Programs ->Woodward -> ToolKit 3.x
Please press the button Open Tool

3.

Go to the Application folder and open then the folder equal to the part number (P/N) of your device
(e.g. 8440-1234). Select the wtool file (e.g. 8440-1234-NEW_US_5418-1234-NEW.wtool) and click
Open to start the configuration file
Now the home page of the ToolKit configuration screen appears

4.

Page 50/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Configure ToolKit Software


1.

Start the configuration by using the toolbar. Please go to Tools -> Options

2.

The options window will be displayed

3.

a. Adjust the default locations of the configuration files


b. The displayed language can be selected here
The changes become effective after clicking OK

NOTE
Please use the ToolKit online help for further information.

Woodward

Page 51/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Connect ToolKit and the MSLC-2 Unit


For configuration of the unit via ToolKit please proceed as follows:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Connect the null modem communications cable between your PC and the control unit. Plug the null
modem cable into the RS-232 serial port on unit and the other side to a serial COM port of the PC. If the
PC does not have a serial port to connect the null modem cable to, use a USB to serial adapter.
Open ToolKit via Windows Start menu -> Programs -> Woodward -> ToolKit 3.x
From the main ToolKit window, click File then select Open Tool..., or click the Open Tool icon
on the tool bar.
Locate and select the desired tool file (*.WTOOL) in the ToolKit data file directory and click Open.
From the main ToolKit window, click Device then click Connect, or select the Connect icon
on
the toolbar.

The connect dialog window will open if the option is enabled.

7.
8.

a. Select the COM port that is connected to the communication cable.


b. Click the Connect button.
The identifier of the device that ToolKit is connected to, will display in the status bar.
If the Communications window opens, select ToolConfigurator under Tool Device and close the
Communications window.

9. If the device is security enabled, the Login dialog will appear.


10. Now you are able to edit the MSLC-2 parameters in the main window. Any changes made are written to
the control memory automatically.

Page 52/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

View MSLC-2 Data with ToolKit


The following figure shows an example visualization screen of ToolKit:

Figure 3-1: ToolKit - visualization screen

Navigation through the various visualization and configuration screens is performed by clicking on
the
and
icons, by selecting a navigation button (e.g.
), or by selecting a screen from the drop-down
list to the right of the arrow icons.
It is possible to view a trend chart of up to eight values with the trending tool utility of ToolKit. The following
figure shows a trending screen of the measured battery voltage value:

Figure 3-2: ToolKit - analog value trending screen

Each visualization screen provides for trending of monitored values by right-clicking on a value and selecting the
"Add to trend" function. Trending is initiated by clicking on the Start button. Clicking the Export button will
save the trend data to a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file for viewing, editing or printing with office software,
like Microsoft Excel, etc. The Properties button is used to define high and low limits of the scale, sample rate,
displayed time span and color of the graph.

Woodward

Page 53/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Configure the MSLC-2 with ToolKit


The following figure shows an example configuration screen of ToolKit:

Figure 3-3: ToolKit - configuration screen

Entering a new value or selecting a value from a defined list will change the value in a field. The new value is
written to the controller memory by changing to a new field or pressing the Enter key.
Navigation through the various configuration and visualization screens is performed by clicking on the
and
icons, by selecting a navigation button (e.g.
), or by selecting a screen from the drop-down list to
the right of the arrow icons.

Page 54/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

The MSLC-2 Version Page


The ToolKit version page allows you to check the serial number of the unit and versions of the bootloader, operating system and GAP application.

Figure 3-4: ToolKit -version page

Woodward

Page 55/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu (Setpoint) Description

All parameters are assigned a unique parameter identification number (ID). The parameter identification number
may be used to reference individual parameters listed in this manual. This parameter identification number is also
displayed in the ToolKit configuration screens next to the respective parameter.

MSLC-2 Homepage
The appearance of the MSLC-2 Homepage depends on the configuration. If the MSLC-2 type is configured as
Utility MSLC-2 (parameter 7628), values and pictures are displayed in the sense being located at the utility. On
the other side, the Tie configured MSLC-2 shows values and pictures related to a tie-breaker sense.
This is the basic page of the MSLC-2. It gives general information, such as:
The system A condition
The system B (busbar) condition
The condition of the breaker
The current operating action
The load and reactive load output to the DSLC-2
The segment breaker state

Figure 3-5: ToolKit - home page (MSLC-2 configured as utility breaker control)

Page 56/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 3-6: ToolKit - home page (MSLC-2 configured as tie-breaker control)

General
ID
4602

7672

Parameter
Synchronizer
mode

Reactive
load control
mode

Woodward

CL

Setting range

Format

Off /
Synchronized /
Permissive /
Check /
Run /
Sync Timer /
Auto-Off /
Close Timer

Off /
Inactive /
Voltage Control /
VAR Control /
Power Factor
Control /
Const Gen PF
Control /

Description
Display of the different Synchronizer modes:
Off: The synchronizer is not active.
Synchronized: The CB is closed.
Permissive: The synchronizer runs in permissive mode.
Check: The synchronizer runs in check mode.
Run: The synchronizer is full active.
Sync Timer: The synchronizer is stopped, because of a sync
time-out.
Auto-Off: The synchronizer is stopped, because of an unsuccessful closure of the CB. (resync is disabled).
Close Timer: This is the CB close command.
Display of the different Reactive load control modes:
Off: The reactive load control mode is disabled.
Inactive: The reactive load control is not active.
Voltage Control: The voltage control is active.
VAR Control: The reactive load control with kvar reference is active.
Power Factor Control: Power factor control is active.
Const Gen PF Control: The reactive load control with a constant
power factor reference is active.

Page 57/198

Manual 37444A
ID
4603

Parameter
Load control
mode

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Format

Off Line /
Inactive /
Base Load /
Base Load
Lower /
Base Load
Raise /
Base Load Remote /
Process Control /
Process Lower /
Process Raise /
Process
Remote /
Process Ramp /
Import Export
Control /
Import Export
Ramp /
Import Export
Remote /
Imp Exp Lower /
Imp Exp Raise /
Utility Unload

Description
Display of the different Load control modes:
Off Line: The load control mode is disabled.
Inactive: The load control mode is inactive.
Base Load: The Load control is in base load.
Base Load Lower: A base load lower command is active.
Base Load Raise: A base load raise command is active.
Base Load Remote: The load reference is controlled by an analog remote input.
Process Control: The process control is full active
Process Lower: A process reference lower command is active.
Process Raise: A process reference raise command is active.
Process Remote: The process reference is controlled by an analog remote input
Process Ramp: The generators are ramped into process control
Import Export Control: The Import Export control is active.
Import Export Ramp: The generators are being ramped into Im /
Ex control
Import Export Remote: The Import Export reference is controlled
by an analog remote input
Imp Exp Lower: A Import Export lower command is active.
Imp Exp Raise: A Import Export raise command is active.
Utility Unload: The utility or tie-breaker is being unloaded.

4627

Setpoint
frequency

Info

0.00 Hz

The field indicates the current Setpoint Frequency in Hz.

4628

Setpoint
voltage

Info

0.00 %

The field indicates the current Setpoint Voltage in percentage.

4629

Setpoint
load level

Info

0.00 %

Indicates the load level setpoint in percentage.

4630

Setpoint
reactive
power

Info

0.00 %

Indicates the reactive load level setpoint in percentage.

4631

Setpoint
constant
generator PF

Info

0.00

7721

Import /
export
reference

Info

0.0 kW

The field indicates the current import / export setpoint for the
MSLC-2 in kW.

7722

Reactive
load
reference

Info

0.0 kvar

The field indicates the current reactive load setpoint for the
MSLC-2 in kvar.

4605

Process
reference

Info

0.0 %

The field indicates the current Process reference value of the


MSLC-2 process control in percentage.

7726

Process
reference

Info

0.0 kW

The field indicates the current Process reference value of the


MSLC-2 process control in engineering units.

4600

Process
signal input

Info

0.0 %

The field indicates the real Process signal input value of the
MSLC-2 process control in percentage.

7727

Process
signal input

Info

0.0 kW

The field indicates the real Process signal input value of the
MSLC-2 process control in engineering units.

5535

Load level

Info

0.00 %

The gage indicates the load setpoint going to the DSLC-2.

5635

Reactive
load level

Info

0.00 %

The gage indicates the reactive load setpoint going to the


DSLC-2.

4639

Synchro
scope

Info

The gage illustrates a Synchroscope for the relation system A voltage to system B voltage in degrees.

4637

Automatic
segment
allocation

Info

The field indicates the segment number for this unit.

The field indicates the constant generator power factor setpoint


sent to the DSLC-2.

Table 3-7: Parameter - homepage

Page 58/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

3
2
4

Figure 3-8: ToolKit - home page - MSLC-2 configured as utility breaker control

If the electrical diagram is shown in Red the electrical bar is live. Respectively an electrical diagram shown
in Green means a dead bar. *1

Q Sum: Sum of all real reactive load in the same segment in kvar.
P Sum: Sum of all real load in the same segment in kW.
Q: Real reactive load of this path in kvar.
P: Real load of this path in kW.
PF: Power factor in this path.
I: Average current of this path in A.
Ph-N: Average Phase-neutral voltage of system A in Volt.
Ph-Ph: Average Phase-phase voltage of system A in Volt.
f: Real frequency of system A in Hz.

*1

V: System B voltage Volt.


f: Real frequency of system B in Hz.

7726 Process reference: mA - Example of a


configurable engineering unit.
7727 Process signal input: mA - Example of a
configurable engineering unit.

LED: Process PID active Indicates that the process


control PID is activated.
LED: Remote Reference Indicates that the load
control or the reactive load control setpoint comes
by analog input.

The parameter Dead bus detection max. volt. (parameter 5820) defines the dead bus condition.

Woodward

Page 59/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

2
1

Figure 3-9: ToolKit - home page - MSLC-2 configured as tie-breaker control

If the electrical diagram is shown in Red the electrical bar is live. Respectively an electrical diagram shown
in Green means a dead bar. *1

Ph-N: Average Phase-neutral voltage of system A in Volt.


Ph-Ph: Average Phase-phase voltage of system A in Volt.
f: Real frequency of system A in Hz.
P: Real load of this path in kW.
PF: Power factor in this path.
I: Average current of this path in A.

*1

V: System B voltage Volt.


f: Real frequency of system B in Hz.

7726 Process reference: mA - Example of a


configurable engineering unit.
7727 Process signal input: mA - Example of a
configurable engineering unit.

LED: Process PID active Indicates that the process


control PID is activated.
LED: Remote Reference Indicates that the load
control or the reactive load control setpoint comes
by analog input.

The parameter Dead bus detection max. volt. (parameter 5820) defines the dead bus condition.

Figure 3-10: ToolKit - home page - segments

This figure indicates which segments in the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system are interconnected.
LED: Missing device Indicates that the configured number of
connected members (DSLC-2 and MSLC-2) is not recognized on
the network.
LED: Centralized alarm Any configured alarm is active.

Page 60/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 1 Synchronizer
This menu contains the adjustments of the synchronizer.

Figure 3-11: ToolKit synchronizer

PID Frequency Control


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4539

Frequency
synchronizer
proportional
gain

0.01 to 100.00

0.80

Frequency sync gain determines how fast the synchronizer responds to an error in speed or phase. Adjust gain to provide stable control during synchronizing. Lower value to slow response.

4540

Frequency
synchronizer
integral gain

0.00 to 20.00

0.50

Frequency sync integral gain compensates for delay in the synchronizer control loop. Prevents low frequency hunting and damping (overshoot or undershoot). Lower value to slow response.

5505

Phase
matching
gain

1 to 99

The Phase matching gain increases or decreases the influence of


the phase angle deviation to the frequency control. Prevents frequency hunting and damping (overshoot or undershoot) when the
synchronizer is enabled with phase matching function.

5506

Phase
matching
df-start

0.02 to 0.25 Hz

0.05 Hz

Phase matching is started if the frequency difference between the


systems to be synchronized is below the configured value.

5707

Phase
matching CB
dwell time

0 to 60.0 s

0.5 s

5516

Start
frequency
control level

0.00 to
70.00 Hz

55.00 Hz

Woodward

Dwell Time: This is the minimum time that the system A voltage,
frequency and phase angle must be within the configured limits
before the breaker will be closed. Set to lower time for quicker
breaker closure commands.
The frequency controller is activated when the monitored system
B frequency has exceeded the value configured in this parameter.
This prevents the MSLC-2 from attempting to control the frequency while the engine is completing its start sequence.

Page 61/198

Manual 37444A
ID
5517

Parameter
Start
frequency
control delay

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

0 to 999 s

1s

CL

Setting range

Default

Description
The frequency controller is enabled after the configured time for
this parameter expires.

PID Voltage Control


ID

Parameter

Description

5610

Voltage
synchronizer
proportional
gain

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

Voltage sync gain determines how fast the synchronizer responds


to a voltage deviation. Adjust gain to provide stable control during
synchronizing. Lower value to slow response.

5611

Voltage
synchronizer
integral gain

0.01 to 100.00

0.50

Voltage sync integral gain compensates for delay in the synchronizer voltage control loop. Prevents low voltage hunting and
damping (overshoot or undershoot) when the synchronizer is
enabled. Lower value to slow response.

Synchronizer Control
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

5730

Synchronization CB

Slip frequency./.
Phase matching

4712

Slip
frequency
setpoint
offset

-0.50 to 0.50 Hz

Default

Description

Slip frequency: The frequency controller adjusts the frequency in


Slip
frequency a way, that the frequency of the variable system is marginal
greater than the fixed system. When the synchronizing conditions
are reached, a close command will be issued. The slipping frequency depends on the setting of Slip frequency setpoint offset
(parameter 5502).
Phase matching: The frequency controller adjusts the phase angle of the system B to that of the system A.
0.10 Hz

This value is the offset for the synchronization to the variable system to the fixed system. With this offset, the unit synchronizes
with a positive or negative slip.
Example:
If this parameter is configured to 0.10 Hz and the busbar/mains
frequency is 60.00 Hz, the synchronization setpoint is 60.10 Hz.
If this parameter is configured to -0.10 Hz and the busbar/mains
frequency is 60.00 Hz, the synchronization setpoint is 59.90 Hz.

5701

Positive
frequency
differential
CB

0.02 to 0.49 Hz

0.18 Hz

The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the CB is


that the differential frequency is below the configured differential
frequency. This value specifies the upper frequency (positive value corresponds to positive slip > system B frequency is higher
than system A frequency).

5702

Negative
frequency
differential
CB

-0.49 to 0.00 Hz

-0.10 Hz

The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the CB is


that the differential frequency is above the configured differential
frequency. This value specifies the lower frequency limit (negative
value corresponds to negative slip > system B frequency is less
than system A frequency).

5703

Max. positive
phase
window CB

0.0 to 60.0

5.0

The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the CB is


that the leading phase angle between system B and system A is
below the configured maximum permissible angle.

5704

Max. negative phase


window CB

-60.0 to 0.0

-5.0

The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the CB is


that the lagging phase angle between system B and system A is
above the configured minimum permissible angle.

7513

Voltage
matching

Disabled /
Enabled

Enabled

Page 62/198

Enables or disables the synchronizer voltage matching function.


Independent on this setting the voltage control is still executed but
the synchronizer does not care about the voltage matching.

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID
4541

Parameter
Voltage
window

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description

0.50 to 10.00 %

0.50 %

The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing the


breaker is configured here. If the difference between system A
and system B voltage does not exceed the value configured here
and the system A/B voltages are within the according operating
voltage windows, the "Command: Breaker Close" may be issued.
NOTE: When Voltage matching (parameter 7513) is Disabled,
the voltage window is set to the maximum value of 10 %.

7555

Dead bus
closure

Disabled /
Enabled

Enabled

Enables or disables the synchronizer's automatic deadbus detection and breaker closure functions. When enabled, the synchronizer will insure a breaker closure signal when a dead-bus is detected. (This incorporates the dead busbar closure negotiation to
potential other DSLC-2 or MSLC-2 devices)
NOTE: In Menu 5 you find more settings related to the dead busbar closure.

5820

Deadbus
detection
max. volt.

0 to 30 %

10 %

Adjustable voltage in percentage of system A or B rated voltage


for deadbus detection.

5705

Breaker
delay

40 to 300 ms

80 ms

The inherent closing time of the CB corresponds to the lead-time


of the close command. The close command will be issued independent of the differential frequency at the entered time before the
synchronous point.

3417

CB close
hold time

0.10 to 0.50 s

0.50 s

The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being
closed.

3421

CB open
monitoring

0.10 to 5.00 s

2.00 s

If the "Reply: Breaker Open" is not detected as energized once


this timer expires, a "CB fail to open" alarm is issued. This timer
initiates as soon as the "Open breaker" sequence begins.

7514

Auto
resynchronization

Disabled /
Enabled

Enabled

Enables or disables the synchronizer function after achieving synchronization. Synchronization is assumed to have been achieved
if one Reclose delay time interval passes with the CB Aux contact closed.
Disabled: If this setpoint is set to disabled, the synchronizer is set
to auto-off mode after synchronizing. Has no effect on the control.
Enabled: If the CB Aux contact opens and an operating mode is
selected (Run, Check, or Permissive), the synchronizer will automatically restart in the selected operating mode. On restart, the
synch timeout timer and close attempts count are reset to their
specified values.

3419

CB
maximum
closing
attempts

1 to 10

4534

Reclose
delay

1 to 1000 s

2s

Is the number of seconds between attempts to close the circuit


breaker. If the CB Aux contact remains closed for one reclose
delay interval, synchronization is assumed to have occurred. If the
CB Aux contact opens during the reclose delay interval, it is
considered a failed closed attempt. The MSLC-2 control will remain in the selected operating mode (run, check, or permissive)
during the reclose delay interval.

7556

Reclose
limit alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Enabled

Enables or disables the alarm generated when reaching the maximum close attempts.

7557

Synchronizer
timeout
alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

This setting enables or disables the alarm generated by exceeding the synch timeout interval without achieving synchronization.

3063

Synchronizer
timeout

3 to 999 s

60 s

This is the interval over which the synchronizer will attempt to


achieve synchronization. The interval begins when system A voltage is in operating range and either the run or permissive mode
is activated. Failure to get a CB Aux contact closure within the
specified time will result in a synch timeout alarm. The synchronizer must be set to Off mode to clear the interval timer and
alarm.

Woodward

The maximum number of breaker closing attempts if the Reclose


limit alarm (parameter 7556) is Enabled. If Disabled this parameter is disregarded. See chapter 4, Synchronizer Description,
for close command information.

Page 63/198

Manual 37444A
ID
5503

Parameter
Freq. control
setpoint
ramp

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

0.10 to
60.00 Hz/s

Default

Description

2.50 Hz/s The slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the setpoint value. The greater the value, the
faster the change.
Table 3-12: Parameter synchronizer

Page 64/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 2 Load Control


This menu contains the adjustments for load control.

Figure 3-13: ToolKit load control

PID Import/Export Control


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

5510

Import/
export
control
proportional
gain

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

Import/export control proportional gain determines how fast the


load control responds to an import/export load error. Gain is set to
provide stable control. Lower the value for slower response.

5511

Import/
export
control
integral gain

0.01 to 100.00

0.50

Import/export control integral gain compensates for lags in the


load control loop. It prevents slow hunting and controls damping
(overshoot or undershoot) after a load disturbance. Lower the value for slower response.

5512

Import/
export
control
derivative
ratio

0.01 to 100.00

0.01

Import/export control derivative ratio adjusts the rate of change in


the load command during a load transient.

Woodward

Page 65/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Power Control Monitoring


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7504

High load
limit alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

The High load limit alarm specifies if the high load limit alarm will
activate (energize) the High Limit relay (Terminal 44).

4709

High load
limit PU

-150 to 150 %

100 %

The High load limit PU is the import/export load level where (if
enabled) the High Limit relay is energized and the high limit
alarm is activated. The percentage value relates to system A rated
load (parameter 1752).

4526

High load
limit DO

-150 to 150 %

90 %

The High load limit DO is the import/export load level where (if
enabled) the High Limit relay is de-energized and the high limit
alarm is deactivated. The percentage value relates to system A
rated load (parameter 1752).

7505

Low load
limit alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

The Low load limit alarm specifies if the low load limit alarm will
activate (energize) the Low Limit relay (Terminal 45).

4710

Low load
limit PU

0 to 100 %

0%

The Low load limit PU is the import/export load level where (if
enabled) the Low Limit relay is energized and the low limit alarm
is activated. The percentage value relates to system A rated load
(parameter 1752).

4528

Low load
limit DO

-2 to 150 %

5%

The Low load limit DO is the import/export load level where (if
enabled) the Low Limit relay is de-energized and the low limit
alarm is deactivated. The percentage value relates to system A
rated load (parameter 1752).

7506

Load limit
switch

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

Load limit switch specifies if the High Limit and Low Limit relays will activate on high or low limit alarm.

7616

Gen load
high limit
alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

Generator load high limit alarm specifies if the generator high load
limit alarm will activate the High Limit relay (Terminal 44).
The generator high limit alarm is activated when the MSLC-2 is
required to output a system load of 100% to the DSLC-2 controls
in order to meet its reference.
NOTE: The Alarm relay includes additional the self-test function.
Alarm active means relay open.

7617

Gen load low


limit alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

Generator load low limit alarm specifies if the generator low load
limit alarm will activate the Low Limit relay (Terminal 45).
The generator low limit alarm is caused when the MSLC-2 is required to output a system load of 0% to the DSLC-2 controls in
order to meet its reference.

7618

Gen load
limit switch

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

4529

Gen Load
switch 1 PU

0 to 100 %

0%

Generator Load switch 1 PU is the system load level where the


Load Switch1 relay is energized.

4530

Gen Load
switch 1 DO

0 to 100 %

10 %

Generator Load switch 1 DO is the system load level where the


Load Switch1 relay is de-energized.

4538

Gen Load
switch 2 PU

0 to 100 %

100 %

Generator Load switch 2 PU is the system load level where the


Load Switch2 relay is energized.

4543

Gen Load
switch 2 DO

0 to 100 %

90 %

Generator Load switch 2 DO is the system load level where the


Load Switch2 relay is de-energized.

Page 66/198

Generator load limit switch specifies if the high and low limit
alarms will activate the Load Switch 1 or Load Switch 2 relay
when the system load setpoint reaches 100% or respectively 0%.

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Power Control
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

1752

System A
rated load

1 to
999999.9 kW

Default

Description

200.0 kW This value specifies a rated power at the interchange point or over
the tie-breaker. This real power rating is the reference for several
functions, like power control monitoring or ramp scaling.
NOTE: During active power control, the System A rated load value (parameter 1752) may not be changed. The power plant has to
be shut down and the MCB has to be opened.

7717

Import /
export level

-999999.9 to
999999.9 kW

20.0 kW

This value is the load setpoint for the import export control. The
value gets active when the load control setpoint source (parameter 7634) is configured for Internal.
Note: This value is bypassed in the moment of using the raise /
lower setpoint function by DI. The value is triggered, if the CB
Aux goes open and close or another load setting is configured.

3125

Generator
unload trip

0.5 to 99.9 %

3.0 %

Generator unload trip is the percentage limit of the system load


level sent to the DSLC-2s, which must be reached before issuing
the local/gen bus breaker open command.
NOTE: The local/gen bus unload mode will be activated, if the
Load Lower DI is given continuously while in the base load control mode.

4506

Utility unload
trip

0 to 30000 kW

5 kW

Utility unload trip is the load level that the MSLC-2 must be below
before issuing the utility breaker open command during a utility
unload.

3123

Utility unload
trip time

3 to 999 s

60 s

If the monitored system A power does not fall below the limit configured in parameter 3125 before the time configured here expires, a "Breaker open" command will be issued together with an
alarm.

4524

Unload ramp
rate

0.01 to
100.00 %s

3.00 %/s

Unload ramp rate is the rate at which the control ramps between
modes in %/sec. Remember, this refers to unloading the utility,
which is then loading the generator set.

4700

Load ramp
rate

0.01 to
100.00 %s

3.00 %/s

Load ramp rate is the rate at which the control ramps between
modes in %/sec. Remember, this refers to loading the utility,
which is then unloading the generator set.

4515

Raise load
rate

0.01 to
100.00 %ss

1.00 %/s

This is the rate the internal load reference increases, when the
discrete input raise load command is activated.
NOTE: Modbus reference changes will follow this value.

4516

Lower load
rate

0.01 to
100.00 %s

1.00 %/s

This is the rate the internal load reference decreases, when the
discrete input lower load command is activated.
NOTE: Modbus reference changes will follow this value.

4523

Import / export droop

0.0 to 100.0 %

0.0 %

7634

Load control
setpoint
source

Internal /
Interface

Internal

Import / export droop is the droop setting for the import/export


controller. The effect of droop is to make the control more resistant to variations from the import/export reference. This droop has
the effect of causing the target import/export level to go towards a
zero power transfer situation with increasing load. When set to the
default value of zero the import/export control has no droop.
This setting determines from which source the load reference for
the import / export power control comes:
Internal: The setpoint parameter 7717 is valid or the analog input.
The analog remote load reference input is valid, when DI Load
Raise and DI Load Lower are closed.
Interface: The setpoint comes via RS-485 Modbus or TCP/IP
Modbus Interface.

Woodward

Page 67/198

Manual 37444A
ID
7755

Parameter
Interface
switch
import
export

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Export / Import

Export

This setting defines the setpoint argument for the power control
setpoint transferred by interface. This setting gets active when the
Load control setpoint source (parameter 7634) is configured to
Interface.
Export: The value send by interface is an export kW setpoint.
Import: The value send by interface is an import kW setpoint.
Table 3-14: Parameter load control

Page 68/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 3 Process Control


This menu contains the adjustments for process control.

Figure 3-15: ToolKit process control

PID Process Control


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4500

Process
control
proportional
gain

0.01 to 100.00

3.00

The Process control proportional gain determines how fast the


process control responds to an error between the process variable
and reference. The gain is set to provide stable control of the
process. Lower the value to slow the response.

4501

Process
control
integral gain

0.01 s to
100.00 s

3.00 s

The Process control integral gain compensates for delay in the


process control loop. It prevents low frequency hunting and damping (overshoot or undershoot) when a process disturbance occurs.
Lower the value to slow the response.

4502

Process
control
derivative
ratio

0.01 to
100.00 s

0.01 s

The Process control derivative ratio adjusts the rate of change in


speed bias output during a process level transient. Lower the value to slow the response.

Woodward

Page 69/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Process Control
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4508

Process
droop

0.0 to 100.0 %

0.0 %

4509

Process filter

0 to 8

The Process filter adjusts the bandwidth of the filter on the


process input. Higher frequency settings result in faster control response, but also more response to process noise.

7737

Process
reference

-999999.9 to
999999.9

0.2

The Process reference is the internal reference for the process


control. The process engineering units are determined by the selection and settings in Menu 6.1.

4504

Raise
reference
rate

0.01 to 20.00
%/s

0.10 %/s

The Raise reference rate is the rate at which the process reference is increased when the DI Load Raise command is activated.

4505

Lower
reference
rate

0.01 to 20.00
%/s

0.10 %/s

The Lower reference rate is the rate at which the process reference is decreased when the DI Load Lower command is activated.

7559

Process
control
action

Direct / Indirect

Direct

The Process control action specifies if the process variable is direct or indirect acting.

The Process droop is the load droop desired based on process


level.

Direct: If the process variable increases when generator load increases.


Indirect: If the process variable decreases when generator load
increases.

Process Control Monitoring


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description
The Process high limit alarm specifies if the high process limit
alarm is activated.

7500

Process high
limit alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

4510

Process high
limit PU

0.0 to 150.0 %

75.0 %

The Process high limit PU is the process input level where (if
enabled) the High Limit relay output is energized and the high
limit alarm is activated.

4511

Process high
limit DO

0.0 to 150.0 %

75.0 %

The Process high limit DO is the process input level where (if
enabled) the High Limit relay output is de-energized and the high
limit alarm is deactivated.

7501

Process low
limit alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

The Process low limit alarm specifies if the low process limit alarm
is activated.

4513

Process low
limit PU

0.0 to 150.0 %

50.0 %

The Process low limit PU is the process input level where (if
enabled) the Low Limit relay output is energized and the low limit
alarm is activated.

4514

Process low
limit DO

0.0 to 150.0 %

50.0 %

The Process low limit DO is the process input level where (if
enabled) the Low Limit relay output is de-energized and the low
limit alarm is deactivated.

7502

Process
switches

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

The Process switch specifies if the process high and low limits will
activate the High Limit and Low Limit relay outputs.
Table 3-16: Parameter process control

Page 70/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 4 Voltage/Var/PF Control


This menu contains the adjustments for reactive load control.

Figure 3-17: ToolKit voltage/var/pf control

Voltage Control
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

5600

Voltage
control
setpoint

50 to 650.000 V

480 V

This value is the reference for the voltage controller when performing isolated and/or no-load operations. Usually the voltage
control setpoint is the same like the rated voltage setting. In some
cases it could be desired to have another setpoint in isolation operation.

5603

Voltage
control
setpoint
ramp

1.00 to
300.00 %/s

5.00 %/s

The different setpoint values are supplied to the controller via this
ramp. The slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the
controller modifies the setpoint value. A greater value will create a
faster change in the setpoint.

Woodward

Page 71/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Monitoring
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

1770

System A
voltage
monitoring

Phase - phase /
Phase - neutral

Phase phase

This configuration determines the monitored voltage type.

7510

Voltage high
alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

4537

Voltage high
limit

0 to 150 %

110 %

The Voltage high limit setting specifies the voltage high limit alarm
trip point. The input is related to the rated voltage input configurable in Menu 5 (parameter 1766).

7509

Voltage low
alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

The Voltage low alarm specifies if the low voltage limit alarm is activated.

4536

Voltage low
limit

0 to 150 %

90 %

The Voltage low limit specifies the voltage low limit alarm trip
point. The input is related to the rated voltage input configurable in
Menu 5 (parameter 1766).

7511

Voltage
switch

Disabled /
Enabled

Enabled

The Voltage switch specifies if the voltage high and low limits will
activate the High Limit and Low Limit relays.

7512

Voltage
range alarm

Disabled /
Enabled

Disabled

Enables or disables the voltage regulator bias output limit alarm.


The alarm voltage range limit will be activated if the limit of the
voltage bias output reaches 100%.

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Phase phase: Only the phase - phase voltages VL12, VL23 and
VL31 are monitored.
Phase neutral: Only the phase - neutral voltages VL1N, VL2N
and VL3N are monitored.
The Voltage high alarm specifies if the high voltage limit alarm is
activated.

PID Var Control


ID

Parameter

5613

VAR control
proportional
gain

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

Var/PF proportional gain determines how fast the var/PF control


responds to an error signal between kvar/PF reference and
kvar/PF actual measurement. The gain is set to provide stable
control of kvars or power factor. Lower value to slow response.
PID var control loop is active:
VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558)

Var control

PF control
Utility MSLC-2 is operating in

Import/export control

Process control mode

5614

VAR control
integral gain

0.01 to 100.00

0.50

Var/PF integral gain compensates for delay in the reactive power


control loop. This prevents low frequency overshoot or undershoot
when a change in reactive power occurs. Lower value to slow response.
PID var control loop is active:
VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558)

Var control

PF control
Utility MSLC-2 is operating in

Import/export control

Process control mode

5615

VAR control
derivative
ratio

0.01 to 100.00

0.01

Var/PF derivative ratio adjusts the rate of change of the voltage


bias output during a load transient. Lower value to slow response.
PID var control loop is active:
VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558)

Var control

PF control
Utility MSLC-2 is operating in

Import/export control

Process control mode

Page 72/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Var Control
ID
7558

1758

Parameter
VAR PF control mode

System A
rated react.
power

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

PF Control /
VAR Control /
Constant Generator PF

VAR
Control

This setting specifies the reactive load controller:

0.1 to
999999.9 kvar

190.0
kvar

PF Control: The control will maintain a constant PF across the


utility tie by varying the reactive load on the generators to maintain
the PF reference level.
VAR Control: The control will maintain a constant var load level
across the utility tie by varying the reactive load on the generators
to maintain the kvar reference level.
Constant Generator PF: The control will maintain a constant PF
on any generators operating under the MSLC-2 command. The
generators will use the constant gen PF reference of the MSLC-2
as their individual generator PF reference value.
This value specifies the system A reactive power rating, which is
used as a reference figure for related functions.
If unknown, set to 60 % of the kVA or 80 % of the kW rating,
which is the kvar load at 0.8 lagging power factor.

7723

KVAR
reference

-999999.9 to
999999.9 kvar

4690

Rated appar.
power

Info

5622

Reactive
power
setpoint
ramp

0.01 to
100.00 %/s

5620

Power factor
reference

-0.999 to 1.000

1.000

This is the setpoint for the reactive load control when the VAR PF
control mode (parameter 7558) is configured for PF control. The
designations - and + stand for:

Inductive/lagging (+) system A supplying vars

Capacitive/leading (-) system A absorbing vars

5621

Constant
gen. PF
reference

-0.999 to 1.000

0.950

This is the constant reference the MSLC-2 sends to the DSLC-2


controls (the reference level at which to maintain each DSLC-2
controls generator) when in constant generator power factor control mode. In this mode the DSLC-2 control will maintain a constant generator PF level regardless of the amount of vars being
absorbed / generated across the utility tie. This setpoint is active
when the VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) is configured on
Constant Generator PF.

10.0 kvar This is the setpoint for the reactive load control when the VAR PF
control mode is configured for VAR control.
kVA

This field indicates the internal calculated appearance power


which is calculated out of the kW and kvar rating.

10.00 %/s When issuing of different setpoints or during ramp up and ramp
down of the reactive load.The ramp setting is related to rated
reactive power (parameter 1758).

NOTE: The designations + stands for generate inductive/lagging


reactive power with the generator. The designations - stands for
absorb capacitive/leading reactive power with the generator.
NOTE: It is recommended that the constant generator power factor control mode be used in applications where the total generator
kvar capacity is less than the kvar load of the system.

Woodward

Page 73/198

Manual 37444A
ID
7635

Parameter
VAR control
setpoint
source

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Internal /
Interface

Internal

This parameter determines the reactive load control setpoint


source:
Internal

The setpoint comes from:


o
KVAR reference (parameter 7723) at the interchange point when VAR PF control mode
(parameter 7558) is configured on VAR control.
o
Power factor reference (parameter 5620) at
the interchange point when VAR PF control
mode (parameter 7558) is configured on PF
control.
o
Power factor reference at the interchange
point over analog input (parameter 7718)
when VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558)
is configured on PF control and the remote
function is activated. (DI Voltage Raise /
Voltage Lower set).

Interface The setpoint comes from the interface (via RS-485


Modbus or TCP/IP Modbus, Address 7640). The setpoint is a
power factor setpoint. Therefore the VAR PF control mode
(parameter 7558) has to be configured to one of the PF settings.

PF Control: The Modbus parameter 7640 will be the


power factor reference value at the interchange point.

Constant Generator PF: The Modbus parameter 7640


will be the power factor reference for a constant power
factor reference sent to the DSLC-2s.
Table 3-18: Parameter voltage/var/pf control

Page 74/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 5 Configuration
This menu contains system rated frequency, generator rated voltage, PT and CT settings, with operating range
and device number for the configuration of the MSLC-2.

Figure 3-19: ToolKit configuration

General

NOTE
Beside the System A 3-phase or 1-phase measurement the MSLC-2 provides a busbar 1-phase measurements and an auxiliary busbar 3-phase measurement. The busbar 1-phase measurement at the
terminals 37-40 is obligatory and has to be connected in each application. The auxiliary busbar 3-phase
AC measurement at the terminals 21-28 can additionally be used. When both measurements are used
the busbar voltage has to be connected to both inputs. With the parallel use of the auxiliary busbar
measurement, the MSLC-2 can determine correct voltages on all 3 phases and becomes a part of the
operating range- and the phase rotation monitoring.

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

1750

System rated
frequency

50 / 60 Hz

60 Hz

The rated frequency of the system is used as a reference figure


for all frequency related functions. This is used for operating range
limits and frequency monitoring.

1766

System A
rated voltage

50 to 650000 V

480 V

This voltage is always entered as a Phase - phase value. The


rated system A potential transformer primary voltage is used as a
reference figure for all system A voltage related functions, which
use a percentage value, like operating range limits and voltage
monitoring.
NOTE: This value refers to the rated voltage of the system A (system A voltage on data plate) and is the voltage measured on the
potential transformer primary.

Woodward

Page 75/198

Manual 37444A
ID

Parameter

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

1754

System A
rated current

1 to 32000 A

500 A

1850

System A
current input

L1 L2 L3 /
Phase L1 /
Phase L2 /
Phase L3

L1 L2 L3

Description
This value specifies the System A rated current.
L1 L2 L3: All three phases are monitored. Measurement, display
and protection are adjusted according to the rules for 3-phase
measurement.
Phase L {1/2/3}: Only one phase is monitored. Measurement,
display and protection are adjusted according to the rules for single-phase measurement. Monitoring refers to the selected phase.
NOTE: Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in
the installation chapter. This parameter is only effective if System
A voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured to
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W or 3Ph 4W OD.

1851

System A
voltage
measuring

3Ph 4W /
3Ph 3W /
1Ph 2W /
3Ph 4W OD

3Ph 3W

3Ph 4W: Wye connected voltages


System A voltage is connected using all 3 phases and a neutral.
This measurement can be directly connected or through potential
transformers (PTs). Voltage monitoring is configured in the
Voltge/VAR/PF Menu 4, parameter 1770. This setting determines if the MSLC-2 uses Phase - phase or Phase - neutral
voltage for protection.
3Ph 3W: Delta connected voltages
System A voltage is connected using all 3 phases. This measurement can be directly connected or through potential transformers (PTs).
This configuration is used when:

The system A is connected to the load using 3-phase


and neutral

The system A voltage is connected to the MSLC-2


using 3-wire, Phase - phase

The L2 phase is not grounded on the input of the


MSLC-2
And when:

The system A is connected to the load using 3 phases


and no neutral

The system A voltage is connected to the DSLC-2


using 3 wire, Phase - phase

The L2 phase can be grounded or left ungrounded


1Ph 2W: Wye or delta connected system
System A is connected using L2 phase and neutral or L1 phase
and L2. This selection should be used when the MSLC-2 will function only as a synchronizer, such as an MSLC-2 in the tie-breaker
mode.
3Ph 4W OD: Delta connected voltages
System A voltage is connected using all 3 phases without a neutral connection. This measurement can be directly connected or
through potential transformers (PTs).
This configuration is used when:

The system A is connected to the load using 3-phase


and neutral

The system A voltage is connected to the MSLC-2 using 3 wire, Phase - phase

The L2 phase is grounded on the input of the MSLC-2


NOTE: Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in
the installation chapter (Voltage Measuring: System A on page
26)

1781

System B
rated voltage

50 to 650000 V

480 V

The system B potential transformer primary voltage is entered in


this parameter.
This value can be:

Phase - phase

Phase - neutral
They dependent on the 1Ph 2W voltage input (parameter 1858)
setting. The system B rated voltage is used as a reference figure
for all system B voltage related functions.
NOTE: This value refers to the rated voltage of system B and is
the voltage measured on the potential transformer primary.

Page 76/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID
1858

Parameter
1Ph2W
voltage input

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Phase phase /
Phase neutral

Phase
phase

Phase phase: The unit is configured for measuring phasephase voltages, if 1Ph 2W measuring is selected.
Phase neutral: The unit is configured for measuring phaseneutral voltages, if 1Ph 2W measuring is selected.
NOTE: When this parameter is configured wrong the synchronization phase angle system A <-> Bus would be wrong calculated.

1859

1Ph2W
phase
rotation

CW / CCW

CW

CW: A clockwise rotation field is considered for 1Ph 2W measuring.


CCW: A counter-clockwise rotation field is considered for 1Ph 2W
measuring.

1853

Aux system
B voltage
meas.

3Ph 4W /
3Ph 3W /

3Ph 3W

In case of a 3-phase measurement connection of auxiliary system


B, the connection has to be defined.
3Ph 4W: Wye connected voltages
Auxiliary system B voltage is connected using all 3 phases and
neutral. This measurement can be directly connected or through
potential transformers (PTs). Voltage monitoring is configured in
the Voltage/VAR/PF Control Menu 4, parameter 1770. This setting determines if the MSLC-2 uses the Phase - phase or Phase
- neutral voltage measurement for protection.
3Ph 3W: Delta connected voltages
Auxiliary system B voltage is connected using all 3 phases. This
measurement can be directly connected or through potential
transformers (PTs). Voltage monitoring is configured in the Voltage/VAR/PF Control Menu 4, parameter 1770. This settings
must be configured for Phase - phase.

7649

Auxiliary
system B
available

No / Yes

No

CL

Setting range

Default

50 to 650000 V

480 V

No: The auxiliary system B measurement is not used.


Yes: The auxiliary system B measurement is used and becomes
a part of the operating range- and the phase rotation monitoring.
The auxiliary system B measurement is displayed in Menu 7.

Transformer
ID
1801

Parameter
System A
PT primary
rated voltage

Description
The value is always entered as the Phase - phase measurement. Some system A applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate measuring the voltages produced by
the system A. The rating of the primary side of the potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
If the system A application does not require potential transformers
(i.e. the generated voltage is 480 V or less), then the generated
voltage will be entered into this parameter.

Woodward

Page 77/198

Manual 37444A
ID
1800

Parameter
System A PT
secondary
rated voltage

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

50 to 480 V

120 V

Description
The value is always entered as the Phase - phase measurement. Some system A applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate measuring the voltages produced by
the system A. The rating of the secondary side of the potential
transformer must be entered into this parameter. If the system A
application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the generated voltage is 480 V or less), then the generated voltage will be
entered into this parameter.

Rated voltage: 120 Vac (this parameter configured between 50 and 130 V) System A voltage: Terminals
29/31/33/35
Rated voltage: 480 Vac (this parameter configured between 131 and 480 V) System A voltage: Terminals
30/32/34/36

NOTE: The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring inputs. The voltage range of these measurement inputs is dependent upon what terminals are used. This value refers to the secondary voltages of the potential transformers, which are directly
connected to the control.
WARNING: Only connect the measured voltage to either the 120
Vac or the 480 Vac inputs.
1806

System A
CT primary
rated current

1 to 32000 A/x

500 A/x

The input of the current transformer ratio is necessary for the indication and control of the actual monitored value. The current
transformers ratio should be selected so that at least 60% of the
secondary current rating can be measured when the monitored
system is at 100% of operating capacity (i.e. at 100% of system
capacity a 5 A CT should output 3 A). If the current transformers
are sized so that the percentage of the output is lower, the loss of
resolution may cause inaccuracies in the monitoring and control
functions and affect the functionality of the control.

1804

System B
PT primary
rated voltage

50 to 650000 V

480 V

The value is always entered as the Phase - phase measurement.Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate measuring the voltages to be monitored. The
rating of the primary side of the potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the
measured voltage is 480 V or less), then the measured voltage
will be entered into this parameter.

1803

System B
PT secondary rated voltage

50 to 480 V

120 V

This voltage is always entered as a Phase phase measurement. Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate measuring the system B voltages. The rating
of the secondary side of the potential transformer must be entered
into this parameter. If the application does not require potential
transformers (i.e. the measured voltage is 480 V or less), then the
measured voltage will be entered into this parameter.

Rated voltage: 120 Vac (this parameter configured between 50 and 130 V)
o
System B voltage: Terminals 37/39
o
Auxiliary System B voltage: Terminals
21/23/25/27
Rated voltage: 480 Vac (this parameter configured between 131 and 480 V)
o
System B voltage: Terminals 38/40
o
Auxiliary System B voltage: Terminals
22/24/26/28

NOTE: The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring inputs. The voltage range of these measurement inputs is dependent upon what terminals are used. This value refers to the secondary voltages of the potential transformers, which are directly
connected to the control.
WARNING: Only connect the measured voltage to either the
120 Vac or the 480 Vac inputs.

Page 78/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Operating Ranges

NOTE
The operating ranges are settings, which are used for determining the generator is operating at the
correct voltage and frequency. Drop out of the operating range is not monitored with an alarm. The operating ranges are valid for generator, busbar and auxiliary busbar measurement, if used. It is recommended to configure the operating limits within the monitoring limits.

NOTE
For monitoring the operating ranges respectively, the information can be read by interface or the Home
page in ToolKit and is also displayed by the LEDs conditions.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

5800

Upper
voltage limit

100 to 150 %

110 %

The maximum permissible positive deviation of the voltage from


the System B rated voltage (parameter 1768) is configured here.

5801

Lower
voltage limit

50 to 100 %

90 %

The maximum permissible negative deviation of the voltage from


the System B rated voltage (parameter 1768) is configured here.

5802

Upper
frequency
limit

100.0 to 150.0 %

110.0 %

The maximum permissible positive deviation of the frequency from


the rated system frequency (parameter 1750) is configured here.

5803

Lower
frequency
limit

50.0 to 100.0 %

90.0 %

The maximum permissible negative deviation of the frequency


from the rated system frequency (parameter 1750) is configured
here.

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

System Settings
ID

Parameter

1702

Device
Number

33 to 48

33

A unique address is assigned to the control though this parameter. This unique address permits the controller to be correctly
identified on the network. The address assigned to the controller
may only be used once. All other network addresses are calculated on the number entered in this parameter. The device number is also important for the device assignment in load sharing.

4544

Basic
segment
number

1 to 8

The Basic segment number describes where the MSLC-2 is


placed in relation to other DSLC-2 or MSLC-2. As long as no tiebreaker is located between the busbar voltage measurement of
multiple MSLC-2s, the parameter can be remain on 1.
Tie-breaker MSLC-2s should have the basic segment number that
is on the system A side.
NOTE: In case there are different segments available in the application please follow the rules on page 105.

7628

Type of
MSLC
breaker

Woodward

Utility / Tie

Utility

Specifies the type of MSLC-2.


Utility: The MSLC-2 controls the utility breaker. The parameters
7624, 7625 and 7627 are ignored.
Tie: The MSLC-2 controls a tie-breaker (no direct segment connection to utility). The parameters 7624, 7625 and 7627 are active.

Page 79/198

Manual 37444A
ID
7626

Parameter
Switch alive
bus A ->
dead bus B

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Yes / No

Yes

Description
There could come up a situation that a live busbar at measurement A shall be closed on a dead busbar at measurement B. This
configuration is allowing the closure in such a case. If this closure
is not allowed, the MSLC-2 would not close the breaker in this
case.
Yes: The closure is allowed in such a situation, if:

Dead busbar closure is enabled (Menu 5,


parameter 7555) AND

The live busbar A is within the operating ranges


(parameter 5800 to parameter 5803) AND

The busbar B is dead in the sense of the parameter


Dead bus detection max. volt. (Menu 5, parameter
5820).
No: The closure is not allowed in such a situation.
NOTE: This parameter is only effective, if parameter 7628 is configured to "Tie".

Tie-breaker
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

7624

Smaller
segment at
measurement

System A /
System B

Default

Description

System A The measurement connections A and B could be turned depending on the application. The MSLC-2 needs this information for the
automatic segment allocation.
System A: The segment number of the bar at which the measurement system A is connected is smaller than the segment
number at measurement B.
System B: The segment number of the bar at which the measurement system B is connected is smaller than the segment
number at measurement A.
NOTE: For further information refer to the description in Chapter 8
Network / System Description.
NOTE: This parameter is only effective, if parameter 7628 is configured to "Tie".

7625

Switch
deadbus A ->
dead bus B

Yes / No

Yes

There could come up a situation that both sides of the breaker are
dead and a close command is given to the tie MSLC-2. This configuration is allowing the closure in such a case. If this closure is
not allowed, the MSLC-2 would not close the breaker in this case.
Yes: The closure is allowed in such a situation, if:

Dead busbar closure is enabled (Menu 5, parameter


7555) AND

Both busbars are dead in the sense of the parameter


Dead bus detection max. volt. (Menu 5, parameter
5820).
No: The closure is not allowed in such a situation.
NOTE: This parameter is only effective, if parameter 7628 is configured to "Tie".

Page 80/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID
7627

Parameter
Switch alive
bus B ->
dead bus A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Yes / No

Yes

Description
There could come up a situation that a live busbar at measurement B shall be closed on a dead busbar at measurement A. This
configuration is allowing the closure in such a case. If this closure
is not allowed, the MSLC-2 would not close the breaker in this
case.
Yes: The closure is allowed in such a situation, if:

Dead busbar closure is enabled (Menu 5,


parameter 7555) AND

The a live busbar B is within the operating ranges


(parameter 5800 to parameter 5803) AND

The dead busbar A is dead in the sense of the parameter Dead bus detection max. volt. (Menu 5, parameter
5820).
No: The closure is not allowed in such a situation.
NOTE: This parameter is only effective, if parameter 7628 is configured to "Tie".

Communication Monitoring
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

4708

Number of
DSLC communicating

0 to 32

Description
The unit monitors the number of communicating DSLC-2. With recognizing a missing member the DSLC-2 sets the missing device
flag, which can be used for an alarm output.

4707

Number of
MSLC communicating

1 to 16

The unit monitors the number of communicating MSLC-2. With recognizing a missing member the MSLC-2 sets the missing device
flag, which can be used for an alarm output.
Table 3-20: Parameter configuration

Woodward

Page 81/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 5.1 Interfaces


This menu contains the parameters for the configuration of the interfaces of the MSLC-2.

Figure 3-21: ToolKit interfaces

Serial Interface 1 RS-232


The serial interface 1 RS-232 is mainly used for the configuration tool ToolKit. This is executed with the
Woodward own Servlink protocol. The RS-232 also allows the access by Modbus protocol with fixed parity, stop
bits and full-, halfduplex mode. The unit acts here as RTU slave.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

3163

Baudrate

9.6 / 14.4 /
19.2 / 38.4 /
56.0 / 115.0
kBaud

19.2 kBd

This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please


note, that all participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.

3161

Parity

fixed

No

3162

Stop bits

fixed

One

3164

Full-, halfduplex mode

fixed

Halfduplex

Description

Modbus Serial Interface 1


ID
3185

Parameter
Modbus
slave ID

Page 82/198

CL

Setting range

Default

0 to 255

The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device


via Modbus, is entered here. If "0" is configured here, the Modbus
is disabled.

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID
3186

Parameter

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

0.00 to 1.00 s

0.00 s

Reply delay
time

Description
This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Modbus master and the response of the slave. This time is also required if an external interface converter to RS-485 is used for example.

Serial Interface 2 RS-485


The serial interface 2 RS-485 allows exclusively access by Modbus protocol with configurable parity, stop bits
and full-, halfduplex mode. The unit acts here as a RTU slave.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

3170

Baudrate

9.6 / 14.4 /
19.2 / 38.4 /
56.0 / 115.0
kBaud

19.2 kBd

This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please


note, that all participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.

3171

Parity

No / Even / Odd

No

3172

Stop bits

One / Two

One

3173

Full-, halfduplex mode

Fullduplex /
Halfduplex

3188

Modbus
slave ID

0 to 255

The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device


via Modbus, is entered here. If "0" is configured here, the Modbus
is disabled.

3189

Reply delay
time

0.00 to 2.55 s

0.00 s

This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Modbus master and the set response of the slave. This time is required in halfduplex mode.

The used parity of the interface is set here.


The number of stop bits is set here.

Fullduplex Fullduplex: Fullduplex mode is enabled.


Halfduplex: Halfduplex mode is enabled.

Network A UDP
The network A UDP ethernet bus is reserved for internal communication between all DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 in
one system independent on the busbar segment. Up to 32 DSLC-2 and up to 16 MSLC-2 can communicate over
the 100ms UDP messages.
ID
5330

Parameter
TCP/IP
address

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Info

192.168.
0.33

Ethernet Channel Network A: Type UDP.


The IP address of Channel A is fixed to: 192.168.0.Device-ID,
where Device-ID = 33 to 48 for MSLC-2.
NOTE: In this field is usually entered the device number of the
unit (parameter 1702).

Network B Modbus/TCP
The network B Modbus/TCP ethernet bus is provided for external communication purposes between all
DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 in one system and a PLC. Up to 10 TCP/IP stacks can be built up per unit.
ID
5430

Parameter
TCP/IP
address

Woodward

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

xxx.xxx.xxx.
(1 to 32)

192.168.
1.33

Ethernet Channel Network B: Type Modbus /TCP.


A PLC can be able to open up to 64 Modbus/TCP channels. The
IP address of Channel B is adjustable in ToolKit:
xxx.xxx.xx.Device-ID, where xxx = 0 to 255 and Device-ID =
33 to 48 for MSLC-2.

Page 83/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Modbus Interface Definitions


The unit offers a Modbus address table with for visualizing systems. The table contains 16bit integer (short) and
32bit integer (long) variables. The contents of some measurement long variables are also available as short variables. To cover all measurement ranges in a satisfying resolution, the engineering unit Watt, Volt and
Ampere can be adjusted according to the application.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

3181

Power [W]
exponent
10^x

2 to 5

Description
This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit power values in the
data telegram.
Example power measurement:
The measurement range is 0 to 250 kW.
Momentarily measurement value = 198.5 kW (198.500 W)

3182

Volts [V]
exponent
10^x

-1 to 2

Setting

Meaning

102

103

104

105

Calculation

198500
102
198500
103
198500
104
198500
105

Transfer
value
(16Bit,
max.
32767)

Possible
Display
Format

1985

198.5 kW

198

198 kW

19

N/A

N/A

This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit voltage values in the
data telegram.
Example voltage measurement:
The measurement range is 0 to 480 V.
Momentarily measurement value = 477.8 V

3183

Current [A]
exponent
10^x

-1 to 0

Setting

Meaning

-1

10-1

100

101

102

Calculation

477.8
101
477.8
100
477.8
101
477.8
102

Transfer
value
(16Bit,
max.
32767)

Possible
Display
Format

4778

477.8 V

477

477 V

47

N/A

N/A

This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit current values in the
data telegram.
Example current measurement:
The measurement range is 0 to 500 A
Momentarily measurement value = 345.4 A
Setting

Meaning

-1

10-1

100

Calculation

345.4
101
345.4
100

Transfer
value
(16Bit,
max.
32767)

Possible
Display
Format

3454

345.4 A

345

345 A

Table 3-22: Parameter configuration interfaces


Page 84/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 5.2 System Management


This menu contains the parameters for the system management of the MSLC-2.

Figure 3-23: ToolKit system management

Password System
The MSLC-2 utilizes a password protected multi-level configuration access hierarchy. This permits varying degrees of access to the parameters being granted by assigning unique passwords to designated personnel. A distinction is made between the access levels as follows:
Code level CL0 (User Level)
Standard password = none
This code level permits for monitoring of the system and limited access to the parameters. Configuration of the
control is not permitted. The unit powers up in this code level.
Code level CL1 (Service Level)
Standard password = "0 0 0 1"
This code level entitles the user to change selected non-critical parameters. The user may also change the password for level CL1. Access granted by this password expires two hours after the password has been entered and
the user is returned to the CL0 level.

Woodward

Page 85/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Code level CL2 (Temporary Commissioning Level)


No standard password available
This code level grants temporary access to most of the parameters. The password is calculated from the random
number generated when the password is initially accessed. It is designed to grant a user one-time access to a parameter without having to give him a reusable password. The user may also change the password for CL1. Access
granted by this password expires two hours after the password has been entered and the user is returned to the
CL0 level. The password for the temporary commissioning level may be obtained from the vendor.
Code level CL3 (Commissioning Level)
Standard password = "0 0 0 3"
This code level grants complete and total access to most of the parameters. In addition, the user may also change
the passwords for levels CL1, CL2 and CL3. Access granted by this password expires two hours after the password has been entered and the user is returned to the CL0 level.

NOTE
Once the code level is entered, access to the configuration menus will be permitted for two hours or
until another password is entered into the control. If a user needs to exit a code level the user would
enter Details and select Log Off. This will block unauthorized configuration of the control. A user
may return to CL0 by allowing the entered password to expire after two hours or by changing any one
digit on the random number generated on the password screen and entering it into the unit.
It is possible to disable expiration of the password by entering "0000" after the CL1 or CL3 password
has been entered. Access to the entered code level will remain enabled until another password is entered. Otherwise, the code level would expire when loading the standard values (default 0000) via
ToolKit.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

10415 Basic code


level

0000 to 9999

The password for the code level "Service (CL1)" is defined in this
parameter.

10414 Temp. commissioning


code level

0000 to 9999

The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level
"Temporary Commissioning (CL2)" is defined in this parameter.

10413 Commissioning code


level

0000 to 9999

The password for the code level "Commission (CL3)" is defined in


this parameter.

10412 Temp.
supercomm.
level code

0000 to 9999

The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level
"Temporary Supercommissioning (CL4)" is defined in this parameter.

10411 Supercommissioning
level code

0000 to 9999

The password for the code level "Supercommissioning (CL5)" is


defined in this parameter.

10416 Random
number for
password

Info

When somebody enters a temporary password level.

10401 Password for


serial
interface 1

0000 to 9999

The password for configuring the control via the serial interface #1
must be entered here.

10430 Password for


serial
interface 2

0000 to 9999

The password for configuring the control via the serial interface #2
must be entered here.

10435 Password for


Ethernet
port 2

0000 to 9999

The password for configuring the control via the Ethernet port #2
(Network B) must be entered here.

10406 Code level


serial
interface 1

Info

This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for
access via RS-232 serial interface #1.

10420 Code level


serial
interface 2

Info

This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for
access via RS-485 serial interface #2.

10425 Code level


Ethernet
port 2

Info

This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for
access via Ethernet port #2 (Network B).

Page 86/198

Description

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Factory Settings
ID

Parameter

10417 Factory
default
settings
1701

Reset factory
default
values

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

No / Yes

No

Selecting Yes will allow the reset back to Factory default settings
by selecting Yes for the Reset factory default values parameter
(parameter 1701).

No / Yes

No

No: All parameters will remain as currently configured.


Yes: All parameters, which the enabled access code grants privileges to, will be restored to factory default values. This value returns to No when factory defaults are set.
Table 3-24: Parameter configuration system management

Menu 6 Analog Inputs


This menu contains the parameters for the configuration of the analog inputs of the MSLC-2.

Figure 3-25: ToolKit analog inputs

Woodward

Page 87/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Remote Load Reference Input / Process Reference Input


This analog input can be used for two functionalities:
1.

Remote load reference input. The input becomes active, if the DI Setpoint Raise / Setpoint Lower
(remote) are closed and the DI Base Load or Imp/Exp Control is closed.

Figure 3-26: ToolKit relevant fields for remote load reference input

The load control interacts with the percentage input value shown in field Reference input (parameter 10177). The
setting on the right side is the scaling for a minimum and maximum load value while displaying the actual kW
setting, which is shown in the field Remote load reference input (parameter 7738).
2.

Process reference input. The input becomes active, if the DI Setpoint Raise / Setpoint Lower (remote) are closed and the DI Process Control is closed.

Figure 3-27: ToolKit relevant fields for remote process reference input

The process control interacts with the percentage input value shown in field Remote reference input (parameter
10117). The setting on the right side will display the actual Process reference (parameter 7726). The process engineering unit will allow you to display a 4 to 20 mA input as a kW value (Example, there are many engineering
units to select). The process signal input and the process reference (remote) will both display the engineering
units selected.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7673

HW signal

0 to 20 mA./
4 to 20 mA./
0 to 10 V./
0 to 5 V./
1 to 5 V

0 to 5 V

Selection of hardware signal range.

Page 88/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Linear
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4311

User defined
min display
value

-100.0 to
100.0 %

0.0 %

Remote load reference input / process reference input. Linear


scaling: This is the percentage value according to the lowest
hardware signal.

4312

User defined
max display
value

-100.0 to
100.0 %

100.0 %

Remote load reference input / process reference input. Linear


scaling: This is the percentage value according to the highest
hardware signal.

Info

0.0 kW

10117 Remote
reference
input

This is the resulting percentage value calculated out of the minimum and maximum scaling as to what the remote input actually
has connected.

7735

Remote load
ref min
value

-999999.9 to
999999.9 kW

7736

Remote load
ref max
value

-999999.9 to
999999.9 kW

7738

Remote load
reference
input

Info

This is the resulting kW value calculated out of the minimum and


maximum scaling.

7726

Process
reference

Info

This is the resulting Process reference value calculated out of the


minimum and maximum scaling, adjusted in parameter 7733 and
parameter 7734.

7732

Process
engineering
unit

kW / C / kPA /
bar / V / mA

kW

The process control engineering units are selected here. With this
input the reference and the real value can be defined in engineering units for easier customer use.

This setting is only in use, if the remote load reference input is in


use (see description above). This value is the according kW value
to the percentage value according to the lowest hardware signal
(parameter 4311).This setting is used to display the analog input
reference in kW.

500.0 kW This setting is only in use, if the remote load reference input is in
use (see description above). This value is the according kW value
to the percentage value according to the highest hardware signal
(parameter 4312). This setting is used to display the analog input
reference in kW.

Process Signal Input


This analog input stands for the process control real signal. The input comes as a hardware signal but the engineering values can be selected here. The process engineering units are adjustable and used for visualizing purposes. The regulation of the process is done with the percentage value.

Figure 3-28: ToolKit process signal input

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7674

HW signal

0 to 20 mA./
4 to 20 mA./
0 to 10 V./
0 to 5 V./
1 to 5 V

1 to 5 V

Selection of hardware signal range.

Woodward

Page 89/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Linear
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4322

User defined
min display
value

-100.0 to
100.0 %

0.0 %

Process signal input (real value). Linear scaling: This is the percentage value according to the lowest hardware signal.

4323

User defined
max display
value

0.0 to 100.0 %

100.0 %

Process signal input (real value). Linear scaling: This is the percentage value according to the lowest hardware signal.

10151 Process
signal input

Info

This is the resulting percentage value calculated out of the minimum and maximum scaling.

7732

Process
engineering
unit

kW / C / kPA /
bar / V / mA

kW

The process control engineering units can be determined here.


With this input the reference and the real value can be defined in
engineering units.

7733

Process min
value

-999999.9 to
999999.9

-500.0

This value is the engineering unit value to the percentage value


according to the lowest hardware signal (parameter 4322).

7734

Process max
value

-999999.9 to
999999.9

500.0

This value is the engineering unit value to the percentage value


according to the highest hardware signal (parameter 4323).

7727

Process
signal Input

Info

This is the resulting process signal input value calculated out of


the minimum and maximum scaling, adjusted in parameter 7733
and parameter 7734.

Reactive Load Input


This analog input stands for the power factor reference signal. Remote var reference control is not available at
this time. To activate the remote reactive load input, the discret inputs Voltage raise and Voltage lower must
be closed.

Figure 3-29: ToolKit reactive load input

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7675

HW signal

0 to 20 mA./
4 to 20 mA./
0 to 10 V./
0 to 5 V./
1 to 5 V

0 to 5 V

Selection of hardware signal range.

Page 90/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Linear
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4333

User defined
min display
value

-0.999 to
0.999 PF

-0.990 PF Power factor reference signal input. Linear scaling: This is the
power factor value according to the lowest hardware signal.

4334

User defined
max display
value

-0.999 to
0.999 PF

0.710 PF Power factor reference signal input. Linear scaling: This is the
power factor value according to the highest hardware signal.

7718

Reactive
load input

Info

This is the resulting power factor reference calculated out of the


minimum and maximum scaling, adjusted in parameter 4333 and
parameter 4334.
Table 3-30: Parameter analog inputs

Woodward

Page 91/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 7 Electrical Parameters


This menu contains the general electrical parameters of the MSLC-2.

Only shown, if
auxiliary system B is enabled
(parameter 7649)

Figure 3-31: ToolKit electrical parameters

Menu 7 provides all the AC measurement, voltage, current, power and reactive power. The system A is always a
3-phase measurement and the system B is measured as a single phase. A configuration in Menu 5, Auxiliary system B available (parameter 7649), allows additionally the measurement of the system B with 3 phases. The option of the 3-phase system B measurement allows the monitoring of all 3 phases and detection of the system B
phase rotation. Menu 7 will display the auxiliary system B measurement values when parameter 7649 is configured toYes.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Format

Description

135

System A
active power

Info

0.0 kW

Display of System A active power in kW.

4622

System A
active power

Info

0%

Display of System A active power in %.

136

System A
reactive
power

Info

0.0 kvar

Display of System A reactive power in kvar.

137

System A
apparent
power

Info

0.0 kVA

Display of System A apparent power in kVA.

160

System A
power factor

Info

1.00

Display of System A power factor.

139

System A
power factor
L1

Info

1.00

Display of System A power factor L1.

Page 92/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID

Parameter

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Format

Description

203

System A
power factor
L2

Info

1.00

Display of System A power factor L2.

204

System A
power factor
L3

Info

1.00

Display of System A power factor L3.

144

System A
frequency

Info

0.00 Hz

Display of System A frequency in Hz.

209

System B
frequency

Info

0.00 Hz

Display of System B frequency in Hz.

216

System B
average volt

Info

0.0 V

Display of System B average voltage in V.

181

Phase angle
system B-A

Info

180.0

Display of Phase angle system B-A in degrees.

4640

Delta
frequency
system B-A

Info

0.00 Hz

Display of Delta frequency system B-A in Hz.

114

System A
voltage L1-N

Info

0.0 V

Display of System A voltage L1-N in V.

115

System A
voltage L2-N

Info

0.0 V

Display of System A voltage L2-N in V.

116

System A
voltage L3-N

Info

0.0 V

Display of System A voltage L3-N in V.

108

System A
Voltage
L1-L2

Info

0.0 V

Display of System A voltage L1-L2 in V.

109

System A
Voltage
L2-L3

Info

0.0 V

Display of System A voltage L2-L3 in V.

110

System A
Voltage
L3-L1

Info

0.0 V

Display of System A voltage L3-L1 in V.

4152

System A
phase
rotation

Info

- / CW /
CCW

111

System A
current L1

Info

0.0 A

Display of System A current L1 in A.

112

System A
current L2

Info

0.0 A

Display of System A current L2 in A.

113

System A
current L3

Info

0.0 A

Display of System A current L3 in A.

4152

Configured
system B
phase rotation

Info

CW /
CCW

Display of the Configured system B phase rotation:


CW: Clock Wise = phase rotation right
CCW: Counter Clock Wise = phase rotation left

Display of System A phase rotation:


-: The phase rotation is not measurable
CW: Clock Wise = phase rotation right
CCW: Counter Clock Wise = phase rotation left

NOTE: This is no measurement displaying. This field shows the


configuration of the 1Ph 2W phase rotation (parameter 1859) in
Menu 5.

Woodward

Page 93/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Auxiliary System B Measurement


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Format

Description

121

Aux System
B voltage
L1-N

Info

0.0 V

Display of Auxiliary System B voltage L1-N in V.

122

Aux System
B voltage
L2-N

Info

0.0 V

Display of Auxiliary System B voltage L2-N in V.

123

Aux System
B voltage
L3-N

Info

0.0 V

Display of Auxiliary System B voltage L3-N in V.

118

Aux System
B voltage
L1-L2

Info

0.0 V

Display of Auxiliary System B voltage L1-L2 in V.

119

Aux System
B voltage
L2-L3

Info

0.0 V

Display of Auxiliary System B voltage L2-L3 in V.

120

Aux System
B voltage
L3-L1

Info

0.0 V

Display of Auxiliary System B voltage L3-L1 in V.

4152

Aux System
B phase
rotation

Info

- / CW /
CCW

Display of Auxiliary System B phase rotation:


-: The phase rotation is not measurable
CW: Clock Wise = phase rotation right
CCW: Counter Clock Wise = phase rotation left

147

Aux System
B frequency

Info

0.00 Hz

Display of Auxiliary System B frequency in Hz.


Table 3-32: Parameter electrical parameters

Page 94/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 8 Control Status Monitor


This menu contains the parameters of the control status monitor of the MSLC-2 showing the actual modes, references and alarms.

Figure 3-33: ToolKit control status monitor

ID
4602

7672

Parameter
Synchronizer
mode

Reactive
load control
mode

Woodward

CL

Setting range

Format

Off /
Synchronized /
Permissive /
Check /
Run /
Sync Timer /
Auto-Off /
Close Timer

Off /
Inactive /
Voltage Control /
VAR Control /
Power Factor
Control /
Const Gen PF
Control /

Description
Display of the different Synchronizer modes:
Off: The synchronizer is not active.
Synchronized: The CB is closed.
Permissive: The synchronizer runs in permissive mode.
Check: The synchronizer runs in check mode.
Run: The synchronizer is full active.
Sync Timer: The synchronizer is stopped, because of a sync
time-out.
Auto-Off: The synchronizer is stopped, because of an unsuccessful closure of the CB. (resync is disabled).
Close Timer: This is the CB close command.
Display of the different Reactive load control modes:
Off: The reactive load control mode is disabled.
Inactive: The reactive load control is not active.
Voltage Control: The voltage control is active.
VAR Control: The reactive load control with kvar reference is active.
Power Factor Control: Power factor control is active.
Const Gen PF Control: The reactive load control with a constant
power factor reference is active.

Page 95/198

Manual 37444A
ID
4603

Parameter
Load control
mode

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Format

Off Line /
Inactive /
Base Load /
Base Load
Lower /
Base Load
Raise /
Base Load Remote /
Process Control /
Process Lower /
Process Raise /
Process
Remote /
Process Ramp /
Import Export
Control /
Import Export
Ramp /
Import Export
Remote /
Imp Exp Lower /
Imp Exp Raise /
Utility Unload

Description
Display of the different Load control modes:
Off Line: The load control mode is disabled.
Inactive: The load control mode is inactive.
Base Load: The Load control operates in base load.
Base Load Lower: A base load lower command is active.
Base Load Raise: A base load raise command is active.
Base Load Remote: The load control setpoint comes remotely.
Process Control: The process control is full active
Process Lower: A process reference lower command is active.
Process Raise: A process reference raise command is active.
Process Remote: The process reference comes remotely
Process Ramp: The Process ramps toward the reference setting
before it hands off to the Process Control.
Import Export Control: The Import Export control is active.
Import Export Ramp: A ramp to a new Import Export reference is
active.
Import Export Remote: The Import Export reference value
comes remotely
Imp Exp Lower: The Import Export lower command is active.
Imp Exp Raise: The Import Export raise command is active.
Utility Unload: The utility (tie-breaker) is unloaded.

7721

Import / export reference

Info

0.0 kW

Display of Import / export load control reference in kW.


This field indicates the momentarily load control setpoint.

4605

Process reference

Info

0.0 %

Display of process control reference in percentage.


This field indicates the momentarily process control setpoint.

7722

Reactive
load
reference

Info

0.0 kvar

7708

Power factor
reference

Info

0.00

4606

Synchronizer
timeout

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Synchronizer timeout.

4607

Sync reclose
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Synchronizer reclose limit.

4608

High load
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: High load limit.

4609

Low load
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Low load limit.

7753

Generator
high limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Generator high limit.

7754

Generator
low limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Generator low limit.

4610

High process
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: High process limit.

4611

Low process
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Low process limit.

4613

High voltage
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: High voltage limit.

4612

Low voltage
limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Low voltage limit.

4614

Voltage
range limit

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Voltage range limit.

4615

Communication error

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Communication error.

4617

Missing
member

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Missing loadshare member.

Page 96/198

Display of Reactive load reference in kvar.


This field indicates the momentarily reactive load control setpoint.
Display of the Power factor reference.

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Format

Description

4618

Centralized
alarm

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: Centralized alarm.

4619

GCB open
failure

Info

- / Alarm

Display of Alarm: GCB open failure.


Table 3-34: Parameter control status monitor

Woodward

Page 97/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 9 Discrete Inputs / Relay Outputs


This menu contains the parameters for the discrete inputs, the discrete input source (hardware or communication
interface) and the discrete outputs (relays) of the MSLC-2.

Figure 3-35: ToolKit discrete inputs / relay outputs

Discrete Inputs
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7671

Check
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 01]: Check.

7671

Permissive
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 02]: Permissive.

7671

Run switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 03]: Run.

7671

CB Aux
contact

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 04]: CB Aux.

7671

Voltage raise
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 05]: Voltage raise

7671

Voltage
lower switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 06]: Voltage lower

7671

Base load
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 07]: Base load.

7671

Utility unload

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 08]: Utility unload.

7671

Ramp pause
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 09]: Ramp pause.

7671

Setpoint
raise switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 10]: Setpoint raise

Page 98/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID

Parameter

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7671

Setpoint
lower switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 11]: Setpoint lower

7671

Process
control
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 12]: Process control

7604

Segment
no .12 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 13]: Segment no 12 active.

7605

Segment
no .23 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 14]: Segment no 23 active.

7606

Segment
no .34 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 15]: Segment no 34 active.

7607

Segment
no .45 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 16]: Segment no 45 active.

7608

Segment
no .56 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 17]: Segment no 56 active.

7609

Segment
no .67 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 18]: Segment no 67 active.

7610

Segment
no .78 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 19]: Segment no 78 active.

7611

Segment
no .81 active

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 20]: Segment no 81 active.

7671

Import
/Export
switch

Open / Closed

Open

Display of discrete input state for [DI 21]: Import/Export control.

Discrete Input Source


ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4157

SourceCheck
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Check switch either DI or communication


interface.

4157

SourcePermissive
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Permissive switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

Source-Run
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Run switch either DI or communication


interface.

4157

Source-CB
Aux contact

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of CB Aux switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

SourceVoltage raise
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Voltage Raise switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

SourceVoltage lower switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Voltage Lower switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

Source-Base
load switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Base Load switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

SourceUtility unload
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Utility Unload switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

Source
Ramp pause
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Ramp Pause switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

SourceSetpoint
raise switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Setpoint Raise switch either DI or communication interface.

Woodward

Page 99/198

Manual 37444A
ID

Parameter

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description

4157

SourceSetpoint
lower switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Setpoint Lower switch either DI or communication interface.

4157

SourceProcess control switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Process Control switch either DI or


communication interface.

4157

SourceImport/Export
switch

DI / COM

DI

Indicates the source of Imp./Exp. Control switch either DI or


communication interface.

CL

Setting range

Default

Description
Display of relay output state for [R 01]: Alarm.

Relay Outputs
ID

Parameter

7572

Alarm

Open / Closed

Closed

7574

High limit

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 03]: High limit.

7575

Low limit

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 04]: Low limit.

7576

Breaker
open

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 05]: Breaker open.

7577

Breaker
close

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 06]: Breaker close.

7578

LCL/Gen
breaker open

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 07]: LCL/Gen breaker open.

7579

Alarm 1

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 08]: Alarm 1.

7580

Alarm 2

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 09]: Alarm 2.

7581

Alarm 3

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 10]: Alarm 3.

7582

Load
switch 1

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 11]: Load switch 1.

7583

Load
switch 2

Open / Closed

Open

Display of relay output state for [R 12]: Load switch 2.


Table 3-36: Parameter discrete inputs / outputs

Page 100/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Menu 0 Diagnostics
This menu contains the alarms that can be connected to output either for relays 8, 9 or 10.

Figure 3-37: ToolKit diagnostics

Set Alarm to Off / Alarm1 / Alarm2 / Alarm3


Each alarm can be set on relay 8 (Alarm 1), relay 9 (Alarm 2) or relay 10 (Alarm 3). Multiple parameters can be
selected for the same alarm.
ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7584

Synchronizer
timeout
alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7585

Reclose limit
alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7586

High load
limit alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7587

Low load
limit alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7588

High process
limit alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7589

Low process
limit alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7590

Low voltage
limit alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7591

High voltage
limit alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

Woodward

Page 101/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

7592

Voltage
range limit
alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7593

Communication error
alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7595

Missing
member
alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7596

Centralized
alarm

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.

7597

CB open fail

Off / Alarm1 /
Alarm2 / Alarm3

Off

Passing the alarm to relay Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3.


Table 3-38: Parameter diagnostics

NOTE
Communication error alarm (parameter 7593) is activated when no other devices can be found. The
Missing member alarm (parameter 7595) is activated by a setting in Menu 5, parameter 4063 and 4707).
Both alarms refer to the Ethernet A interface.

Page 102/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Overview Pages
The MSLC-2 provides 2 overview pages showing information from up to 32 DSLC-2 and up to 16 MSLC-2.

DSLC-2 Overview Page


The DSLC-2 overview page 1 informs about the conditions of the DSLC-2 number 1 to 32 connected to the network. This helps for commissioning a DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system.

Figure 3-39: ToolKit DSLC-2 overview page

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Auto
segment
number

1 to 8

This field indicates what each DSLC-2 recognizes to which segment number it is accorded to.

Unit id
available

No / Yes

This field indicates the availability in the system.


No: Not available in the system.
Yes: Available in the system.
Table 3-29: Parameter DSLC-2 overview page

Woodward

Page 103/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

MSLC-2 Overview Page


The MSLC-2 overview informs about the conditions of the MSLC-2 number 33 to 48 connected to the network.
This helps for commissioning a DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system.

Figure 3-40: ToolKit MSLC-2 overview page

ID

Parameter

CL

Setting range

Default

Description

Auto
segment
number

1 to 8

This field indicates what each MSLC-2 recognizes to which segment number it is accorded to.

Unit id
available

No / Yes

This field indicates the availability in the system.


No: Not available in the system.
Yes: Available in the system.
Table 3-30: Parameter MSLC-2 overview page

Page 104/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Prestart Setup Procedure

Apply power to the MSLC-2 control. Verify that the MSLC-2 control passes its power up diagnostics by checking that self-test relay (terminal 41 / 42) is energized. If the unit fails see Appendix B, Service Options for instructions on getting service for the control. Connect the PC configuration software ToolKit via RS-232 connection to the MSLC-2.

Configuration Menu
Select Menu 5 and adjust all measurement and system relevant configuration items. Set the following setpoints to
their appropriate value as described in menu (setpoint) descriptions.
1.
2.
3.

Operating Ranges
Transformer
System Settings

If you have an application with multiple units please check the device number (parameter 1702) of each:
The DSLC-2s getting device numbers from 1 to 32
The MSLC-2s getting device numbers from 33 to 48

Woodward

Page 105/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Prestart Segmenting Setup


The Menu 5 contains a configuration named Basic Segment Number (parameter 4544).
In the following cases the basic segment number is configured to the default value (1):
There is only one single DSLC-2 in use
There are multiple DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 installed, which work on a common bus, which cannot be separated. (only one segment available)
When the application contains switching elements between DSLC-2s and/or MSLC-2s proceed with following
rules:
1. Draw an online diagram of your application with all generators, breakers and utility inputs. Then arrange the
DSLC-2 (and MSLC-2) at the according breaker. Refer to Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41: Example of an online diagram

2. Draw the measurement systems arrows between unit and bars (refer to Figure 3-42).
Please consider following rules:
The DSLC-2 is placed at the generator breaker.
The MSLC-2 can be placed at the tie-breaker and at the utility breaker.
The MSLC-2 at the utility is doing the utility voltage measurement always with system A measurement.
The system B measurement is connected to the busbar.
The MSLC-2 at the tie-breaker usually has the system A on the left side and the system B on the right
side.

Page 106/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

3. Draw the segment numbers into your online diagram (refer to Figure 3-42).
Please consider following rules:
Begin on the left side with segment number 1.
The utility and the generators are not segments in sense of the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system.
The segment numbers have to follow a line and shall not branch. (Please refer there for to the chapter
Network/System) for a better understanding.
4. Draw the device numbers of your units in your online diagram (refer to Figure 3-42).
Please consider following rules (for a better overview and understanding):
The DSLC-2 on the left side should begin with device number 1.
The DSLC-2s getting device numbers between 1 and 32.
The MSLC-2 on the left side should begin with device number 33.
The MSLC-2s getting device numbers between 33 and 48.
5. Draw the CB Aux feedbacks and segment connection feedbacks in your online diagram
(refer to Figure 3-42).
Please consider following rules (for a better overview and understanding):
The DSLC-2 getting usually only their generator breaker feedback.
The MSLC-2 at the utility breaker getting usually only their utility breaker feedback.
The MSLC-2 at the tie-breaker getting usually their tie-breaker feedback and parallel the according
segment connector feedback.

Figure 3-42: Example of an online diagram with segment numbers and segment connector feedbacks

Woodward

Page 107/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

6. Draw the switch and its network for Ethernet channel A and B, if used, in your online diagram
(refer to Figure 3-43).
Please consider following rules (for a better overview and understanding):
Ethernet A is for the device interconnection. Each Ethernet channel A connection gets an own individual
UDP TCP/IP address.
Ethernet B is for the PLC connection. Each Ethernet channel B connection gets an own individual Modbus TCP/IP address.

Figure 3-43: Example of an online diagram with according network

Page 108/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

7. You can optionally draw the current measurement and the amount of phases in your online diagram (refer to
Figure 3-44).
Please consider following rules (for a better overview and understanding):
The current measurement is always on system A. So the locations for the CT are fixed for DSLC-2 and
MSLC-2 (only located at the utility).
MSLC-2 located at tie-breaker: When the CT at the tie-breaker is located on the right side it is allowed
to turn system A and system B measurement at the tie-MSLC-2. But please draw this clear in your online diagram.
The positive power flow for MSLC-2 power measurement is defined from A to B.
The busbar measurement can be 1-phase or 3-phase executed. Please remark this with lines over the
busbar / system B measurement.

Figure 3-44: Example of an online diagram with all required information to setup the units

8. With the information out of the online diagram, following parameters shall be configurable now:
1. Menu 5 Device number (parameter 1702): Enter the according device number in the particular units
2. Menu 5 Basic segment number (parameter 4544):
DSLC-2: Enter the according segment number of the particular unit.
MSLC-2 at the utility breaker: Enter the according segment number of the particular
unit.
MSLC-2 at the tie-breaker: Enter the according segment number which is resided on
the left side.
3. Setting in MSLC-2 Menu 5 Type of MSLC breaker (parameter 7628): Enter Utility or Tie.
4. Setting in the tie-MSLC-2 Menu 5 Smaller number at measurement (parameter 7624): System A or
System B.
Now you should have all segment related settings in all units. Please store your pictures for better trouble shooting later.

Woodward

Page 109/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Prestart Synchronizer Setup


Set all synchronizer (Menu 1) setpoints according to the descriptions above and the work sheet. Leave unknown
values, such as gain and stability, at their default values.

Prestart Load Control Setup


Set all load control (Menu 2) setpoints according to the descriptions above and the work sheet. Proportional load
control mode should be used during initial setup of the DSLC-2 control. Set the unload trip setpoint to approximately 10% of rated load.

Prestart Process Control Setup


Set all process control (Menu 3) setpoints according to the descriptions above and the work sheet. If gain and stability values are unknown, leave at their default values.

Prestart Var/Power Factor Control Setup


Set all var/power factor control (Menu 4) setpoints according to the descriptions above and the work sheet. Set
VAR PF control mode to Disabled until doing the var/PF control adjustment section below.

Page 110/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

MSLC-2 Control Adjustments

When the prestart setup procedures above have been completed, the MSLC-2 may be installed into the system
and the following adjustment procedures must be followed. After the unit has been installed and before applying
power to the PT and CT inputs, verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

The MSLC-2s see the proper number of DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 controls on the network (see overview
page DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 in ToolKit).
The DSLC-2s see the proper number of DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 controls on the network (see overview
page DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 in ToolKit).
The MSLC-2 recognizes the synchronizer switch inputs (see Menu 9).
The synchronizer is in the OFF mode.

Calibration Check

Load the system up to a typical import/export level. Check Menu 7 to ensure that the MSLC-2 is sensing the
proper voltages, currents, power levels and power factor. Power must measure positive when being imported
from the utility. Use Figure 3-45 to help verify all measurements.

Break the parallel with the utility.


Ensure that the MSLC-2 synchronizer mode is Off (Menu 8).
Verify that the MSLC-2 sees the proper number of MSLC-2 / DSLC-2 controls (overview pages).
Verify that the MSLC-2 shows active and reactive power flow in the right signing (Homepage).

Figure 3-45: Power measurement

Woodward

Page 111/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Synchronizer Adjustments

This section is for adjusting the synchronizer functions including procedures for phase matching and slip frequency synchronizing. Note that dynamic adjustments for gain and stability will be different for each method. To
assist in setup and adjustments, you can monitor synchronizer mode of operation on Homepage or Menu 8 and
synchronizer mode and slip frequency and synchroscope values on Menu 7.

Preliminary Synchronizer Adjustments


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Set the Voltage matching setpoint (parameter 7513) to Disabled.


Select Menu 1 and verify that the Frequency synchronizer proportional gain (parameter 4539) and Frequency synchronizer integral gain (parameter 4540) setpoints are set to their default values.
Set the maximum phase window (parameter 5703, parameter 5704) and maximum slip window (parameter 5701, parameter 5702) setpoints to the desired values or use the default values if unknown.
Set Breaker delay (parameter 5705) to the closure time specified by the breaker manufacturer. Add delay time for any interposing relays if required.
Set CB close hold time (parameter 3417) to the time desired for the MSLC-2 control to hold the breaker
closure signal. This time should at least exceed the breaker delay time.
Set the close attempts (parameter 3419) setpoint to 1.
Set the Synchronizer timeout (parameter 3063) setpoint to 0.
Set Auto re-synchronize (parameter 7514) to Disabled.

Proceed to the phase matching synchronizer or slip frequency synchronizer section as required.

Phase Matching Synchronizer


Do the following steps to setup the synchronizer dynamics for use as a phase matching synchronizer. For slip frequency synchronizing, see the procedure below. The MSLC-2 control indicates the phase angle with the Synchroscope on the ToolKit Homepage (parameter 4639).

NOTE
The synchroscope on the Homepage will show the right phase angle, when all electrical settings are
correctly done and the wire connections to the unit are correct. Double check the phase angle across
the breaker with a voltmeter or other phase testing device.

1.
2.
3.

Set the Synchronization CB (parameter 5730) to Phase matching.


Close the synchronizer Check mode switch.
With system A active (mainly utility) system B active (mainly generator bus), adjust the synchronizer
proportional gain setpoint for stable control of the utility frequency as indicated by synchroscope holding steady at zero phase.

NOTE
If the system (not the MSLC-2 control) synchroscope does not lock close to zero phase, but at some
other value (such as 30, 60, 180, 210, etc. degrees), verify system A and system B potential wiring to either the synchroscope or MSLC-2 control.
DO NOT PROCEED WITH ANY ACTION RESULTING IN BREAKER CLOSURE UNTIL THE PROBLEM IS
DETERMINED AND CORRECTED.

4.

5.

6.

Turn the synchronizer mode to Off (open discrete inputs). Allow the phase to drift until the synchroscope indicates approximately 150 degrees fast. It may be necessary to adjust the engine speed setting
slightly fast to achieve the desired phase drift.
Turn the synchronizer mode to Check. The synchronizer should pull the generator smoothly into
phase lock. If the synchronizer action is too slow, increase Frequency synchronizer proportional gain
(parameter 4539) by a factor of two. If increasing sync gain results in unstable operation, reduce the value by at least one-half and proceed to step 6. Otherwise, repeat steps 4 and 5.
Do step 4 and then turn the synchronizer mode to Check. The synchronizer should pull the generator
smoothly into phase lock. If the synchronizer is too slow or over-damped, increase integral gain
(parameter 4540) by a factor of two to decrease damping and increase sync proportional gain by a factor

Page 112/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

of two. If the synchronizer is too fast or under-damped as indicated by excessive overshoot of zero
phase when pulling in, decrease sync proportional gain by a factor of two and decrease integral gain by a
factor of two to increase damping.
7. Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6, with smaller adjustment steps until satisfactory performance is obtained.
8. Turn the synchronizer mode to Off. Allow the phase to drift until the synchroscope indicates approximately 150 degrees slow. It may be necessary to adjust the engine speed setting slightly slow to achieve
the phase drift. Repeat steps 5 and 6 if necessary to get the desired performance.
9. Verify synchronizer performance under all expected operating conditions, such as synchronizing at
higher or lower speeds.
10. If voltage matching is to be used, do the setup in the voltage matching section below.
Proceed to final synchronizer setup.

Slip Frequency Synchronizer


Do the following steps to setup the synchronizer dynamics for use as a slip frequency synchronizer.
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

Complete the phase matching synchronizer setup before continuing.


Turn the synchronizer mode to Off. Set the Slip frequency setpoint offset (parameter 4712) to the desired slip rate. Set engine speed slightly slow.
Turn the synchronizer mode to Check. The synchronizer should drive engine speed so that phase rotation is smooth and at the correct rate as indicated on a synchroscope or by observing the slip frequency
value on Menu 7 (parameter 4640). If the synchronizer is too slow to react when switched from off to
check mode, increase Frequency synchronizer proportional gain (parameter 4539) by a factor of two. If
the synchronizer action is too aggressive when switched to check mode, reduce the sync proportional
gain by half of what your last adjustment.
Example:
If you moved from a proportional gain of 1 to 2, reduce to 1.5. Repeat until the synchronizer controls the
system A at your desired rate.
Observe the smoothness of phase rotation. If a slow hunt is observed, as indicated by slowing and speeding up of the synchroscope during rotation, increase Frequency synchronizer integral gain (parameter
4540) by a factor of two and repeat step 3. If rapid changes in slip frequency occur, decrease sync
integral gain.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 with smaller adjustment steps until satisfactory performance is obtained. Note that
it may not be possible to remove all slow hunting in slip frequency and this will not adversely affect
synchronization.
Verify synchronizer performance under all expected operating conditions, such as synchronizing from
higher or lower speeds.
If voltage matching or the var/PF control is to be used, do the setup in the voltage matching adjustment
section below.

Proceed with final synchronizer setup.

Woodward

Page 113/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Final Synchronizer Setup


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the circuit breaker to disconnect the system A (usually mains) from system B.
Set close attempts (parameter 3419) to the desired number of times the synchronizer should attempt to
close the circuit breaker. Set to 1 if only one close attempt should be made.
Set Reclose delay (parameter 4534) to the desired interval between close attempts. This should be greater than the time required to recharge the circuit breaker arming mechanism.
If an alarm is desired when the maximum close attempts has been reached, set sync reclose alarm to
Enabled.
Set the Synchronizer timeout (parameter 3063) to the maximum number of seconds the synchronizer should
attempt to achieve synchronization. Set to 0 for no timeout.
If an alarm is desired when the sync timeout interval expires, set the Synchronizer timeout alarm
(parameter 7557) setpoint to Enabled.
If it is desired to automatically attempt to reclose the circuit breaker on loss of synchronization (CB Aux
opens after a successful closure has been accomplished), set the Auto re-synchronize (parameter 7514)
setpoint to Enabled. If set to Disabled, the synchronizer will enter an auto-off mode when synchronization is obtained. It will be necessary to set the synchronizer mode switch to Off and back to the
desired operating mode to restart the synchronizer.

This completes the MSLC-2 control synchronizer setup.

Voltage Matching Adjustments

The following steps will verify the correct operation of the synchronizer voltage matching function. With the
breaker open and at least one generator on line, momentarily raise and lower the voltage on the local generator
bus.

NOTE
Individual DSLC-2 controls must be setup for proper voltage regulator control prior to adjusting the
MSLC-2 control (See the DSLC-2 manual).

Preliminary Voltage Matching Setup


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Select Menu 1 and set the Voltage matching (parameter 7513) setpoint to Enabled.
Select Menu 7 and display both system A and system B voltages.
With the synchronizer Off, manually raise the local bus (system B) voltage until it is approximately
5% higher than the utility voltage.
Set the synchronizer mode to Check. The MSLC-2 should adjust the local bus voltage until it is within
the voltage window selected in Menu 1.
If the voltage cycles through the window without settling into it, use the Voltage synchronizer proportional gain (parameter 5610) and integral gain to obtain the response you want. Lowering these values
will slow the response. It might be that the DSLC-2s will have to be adjusted to obtain the response
needed.
Set the synchronizer to Off, manually lower the local bus voltage until it is approximately 5% lower than
the utility voltage.

7.

Set the synchronizer mode to Check. The MSLC-2 should adjust the local bus voltage until it is within
the voltage window selected in Menu 1.

NOTE
If the slip frequency reference is set to zero, the voltage window is the setpoint chosen in Menu 1. If
the slip frequency reference is set to a negative or slow slip, the voltage window is such that the local
bus voltage must be less than the utility voltage. Conversely, if the slip frequency reference is set to a
positive or fast slip, the voltage window is such that the local bus voltage must be greater than the utility voltage. This ensures that the initial flow of reactive power is in the same direction as the initial flow
of real power.

Page 114/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Final Voltage Matching Setup


1.
2.

Set the voltage high/low limits in Menu 3 to their desired values.


Enable the voltage alarms and voltage switches in Menu 3 if it is desired to activate the alarm or the
high/low limit relay drivers upon exceeding a setpoint.

Load Control Adjustment

This section contains the instructions for setup of the MSLC-2 load control. Set all load control setpoints (Menu
2) according to the descriptions above and the work sheet. The Homepage or Menu 8 displays the load control
mode, import/export reference and load command outputs are provided to assist in setup and verification of correct operation.

Base Load Mode Setup


The base load mode is used when manual control of the operating generators is required, or whenever the generators are desired to be maintained at a set percentage of their rated load without regard to plant loading or import/export levels.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Adjust the setpoints in Menu 2 as described above. Set the parameter Load control setpoint source
(parameter 7634) to Internal. Check that the DIs setpoint raise and lower are not energized.
Switch the MSLC-2 in base load master control. This is done by energizing the DI Base Load and the
CB Aux.
Break the parallel between the local bus (system A) and the utility (system B). Place at least one generator in isochronous load sharing (isolated run).
Watch the Load control mode field (parameter 4603) in the Homepage. Re-synchronize and parallel the
local bus (system B) to the utility (system A). Verify that, when the breaker at the MSLC-2 closes, the
load command assumes the value of system load immediately prior to paralleling.
Temporarily issue a lower setpoint command and then a raise setpoint command. Verify that the load
command changes appropriately and that the engines running in base load respond appropriately. You
can watch in the Homepage the setpoint load level going down to the DSLC-2s (parameter 4629).

Remote Base Load


Do the following steps if the analog Remote load reference input (parameter 7738) is used in base load control.
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

As a basic do the base load mode setup described above.


The value of the remote input is to configure and can be viewed in Menu 6. Before you start the engine
check over the displaying field in Menu 6 (parameter 7738) if the analog input is right transformed in a
base load reference value in kW.
Switch the MSLC-2 in base load master control. This is done by energizing the DI Base Load.
Synchronize and parallel the local bus (system B) to the utility (system A) in the base load mode. Adjust
the signal input to a level different from the present base load level.
Close both the raise and lower setpoint contacts to select the remote mode. The Load control mode (parameter 4603) in Menu 8 or in the Homepage should indicate base load and the load command should
ramp to the specified level.
Raise and lower the analog signal. The load will ramp at the rates chosen in Menu 2 load and unload
ramp rates. These rates may be adjusted to achieve satisfactory performance.
Open the raise and lower setpoint contacts. The Load control mode (parameter 4603) should indicate
base load and the control remains at the last base load level chosen by the analog input.

This completes the remote base load reference setup procedure.

Woodward

Page 115/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Import/Export Mode Setup


1.
2.

3.

4.

As a basic do the base load mode setup described above.


An important assumption for setup this mode is the right connection of the CTs of the MSLC-2. Be sure
that incoming real power (power flow from system A to system B) is displayed positive (see Homepage)
and incoming lagging reactive power is displayed positive as well. Do not proceed if you have not clarified the right measurement.
Check Menu 2 setpoints for Import/export control proportional gain (parameter 5510), Import/export
control integral gain (parameter 5511), Import/export control derivative ratio (parameter 5512) whether
they are adjusted to their default values.
Adjust the setpoints in Menu 2 as described in the parameter setup chapter above. Set the parameter
Load control setpoint source (parameter 7634) to Internal. Check that the DIs setpoint raise and lower are not energized. Configure an import/export reference (parameter 7717), positive value is importing
power from mains, negative value is exporting power to mains.

NOTE
Do not chose an export level if it is not allowed by the utility.
5.
6.
7.

8.

9.

Switch the MSLC-2 in import/export load master control. This is done by energizing the DI Import/Export Control.
Break the parallel between the local bus (system A) and the utility (system B). Place at least one generator in isochronous load sharing.
Re-synchronize and parallel the local bus (system B) to the utility (system A). Verify that, when the
breaker at the MSLC-2 closes, the load command assumes the value of system load immediately prior to
paralleling. The control will ramp the Setpoint load level (parameter 4629) output until the import/export
level is within its target.
If the import/export control is unstable when taking control, decrease the import/export proportional
gain to achieve stability. If the chosen import/export level is not obtainable within the 0 to 100% load
command range, the control will stop at 0% or 100%. If a slow hunt is observed or excessive overshoot
of the export/import value occurs, decrease the process integral gain.
Temporarily issue a lower setpoint command and then a raise setpoint command. Verify that the import/export reference changes appropriately and that the running engines respond appropriately. You can
watch in the Homepage the Setpoint load level (parameter 4629) decreasing to the DSLC-2s.

This completes the import/export setup.

Remote Import/Export Setup


Do the following steps if analog remote load reference input is to be used. The value of the remote input is configured and viewed in Menu 6.
1.
2.

3.

4.

As a basic do the import/export load mode setup described above.


Set the scaling of the analog signal according to the instructions of the Menu 6. The remote load reference signal will be interpreted as an import/export load reference when the DI import/export control is
given.
Close both the raise and lower setpoint contacts to select the remote mode. The load control mode in
Menu 8 or the Homepage should indicate import/export remote and the load command of the MSLC-2
to DSLC-2 ramps to the needed level.
Raise and lower the analog signal. The load will ramp at the rates chosen in Menu 2 load and unload
ramp rates. These rates may be adjusted to achieve satisfactory performance. Open the raise and lower
setpoint contacts the load control mode indicates import/export control and the control keeps the last
import/export level.

This completes the remote import/export reference setup procedure.

Page 116/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Final Load Control Setup


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

8.
9.

Set Menu 2 Load ramp rate (parameter 4700) and Unload ramp rate (parameter 4524)to desired values.
Set Raise load rate (parameter 4515) and Lower load rate (parameter 4516) to desired values.
Set the Utility unload trip (parameter 4506) and Generator unload trip (parameter 3125) levels to their
desired values.
The import real load can be monitored by the high load Limit PU (pick up) and DO (drop out) setpoints.
The settings are related on a rated power system A (parameter 1752).
The export real load can be monitored by the low load limit PU (pick up) and DO (drop out) setpoints.
The settings are related on a rated power at the interchange point (parameter 1752).
If it is desired that the alarm output High load limit (parameter 4608) alarm is activated when load
reaches the high limit PU, set the high load limit alarm setpoint to Enabled. The alarm will be automatically cleared when load drops below the high load limit DO switch point.
If it is desired that the alarm output Low load limit (parameter 4609) alarm is activated when load reaches the low limit PU, set the low load limit alarm setpoint to Enabled. The alarm will be automatically
cleared when load increases to above the low load limit DO switch point.
If it is desired that the high and low limit switches also activate the High Limt and Low Limit relays, set the Load limit switch (parameter 7506) setpoint to Enabled.
Set the load switch PU and load switch DO setpoints to their desired operating levels.

Woodward

Page 117/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Process Control Adjustment

This section contains instructions for setup of the MSLC-2 process control. Menu 6 provides the setting for the
process input signal and the according engineering units. Menu 6 and the Homepage displays the resulting real
signal in percentage and in engineering units. Menu 8 shows the process control setpoint in percentage. The Homepage displays the setpoint process control in perentage and engineering units.
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

10.
11.

12.

13.

Configure in Menu 6 the Process signal input (parameter 7727) according to the chapter setup description Menu 6 in this manual. Dont forget to scale engineering units according to the real process signal.
This is the base that the process control reference signal can be interpreted.
Check Menu 3 setpoints for Process control proportional gain (parameter 4500), Process control
integral gain (parameter 4501), Process control derivative ratio (parameter 4502) and Process filter (parameter 4509) whether they are adjusted to their default values.
Set Menu 3 Process control action (parameter 7559) to Direct or Indirect as required for the
process. If increasing load also increases the process input signal level, use Direct. If increasing load
decreases the process input signal level, use Indirect.
Set the internal Process reference (parameter 7737) setpoint Menu 3 to a value requiring approximately
50% load to maintain the process signal level. If the required process reference is not known at start-up,
operate the MSLC-2 in base load mode. Use the raise and lower setpoint inputs to adjust the load until
the desired process level is obtained. Observe the process input in Menu 6 or the Homepage to determine the required process reference value.
Close the process switch. Select Run on the MSLC-2 to parallel the local bus with the utility. The
MSLC-2 will ramp into process control.
If the process control is unstable when taking control, decrease the Process control proportional gain to
achieve stability. If decreasing Process control proportional gain (parameter 4500) increases instability,
increase Process control integral gain (parameter 4501). If the process control gain is too slow, increase
the Process control proportional gain (parameter 4500) by a factor of two. If a slow hunt is observed or
excessive overshoot of the process reference settings occurs, increase the process integral gain by a factor of two.
In systems experiencing rapid fluctuations of the process input, increasing the process filter will provide
a slower but more stable response.
Introduce Process droop (parameter 4508) if required.
The real process value can be monitored by the Process high limit PU (parameter 4510) and DO setpoints to issue an alarm.
The real process value can be monitored by the Process low limit PU (parameter 4513) and DO setpoints to issue an alarm.
If it is desired that the alarm output High process limit (parameter 4610) alarm is set when the process
input reaches the Process high limit PU (parameter 4510), set the Process high limit alarm (parameter
7500) setpoint to Enabled. The alarm will be automatically cleared when the process input level drops
below the Process high limit DO (parameter 4511) switch point.
If it is desired that the alarm output Low process limit alarm (parameter 7589) is set when the process
input reaches the Process low limit PU (parameter 4513), set the Process low limit alarm (parameter
7501) setpoint to Enabled. The alarm will be automatically cleared when the process input increases to
a level above the Process low limit DO (parameter 4514) switch point.
If it is desired that the high and low limit switches also activate the High Limit and Low Limit relays, set the Process switches (parameter 7502) setpoint to Enabled.

This completes setup and adjustment of the MSLC-2 process control function.

Page 118/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Var/PF Control Adjustment

This section describes the setup and adjustment of the MSLC-2 voltage/var/PF control functions. The voltage
control is used in case of voltage matching for the synchronizer. The var/PF control is used, if the DSLC- 2 /
MSLC-2 system runs parallel to the utility. The values of kvars and average power factor are available in Menu 7
or the Homepage.

NOTE
Var/PF control effectiveness depends on var/PF control in the DSLC-2s. Because of that
commission the DSLC-2 var/PF control first.
1.
2.

Verify that the voltage matching adjustments above have been done.
Select Menu 4 and set VAR control proportional gain (parameter 5613), VAR control integral gain (parameter 5614) and VAR control derivative ratio (parameter 5615) to their default values.

Constant Generator Power Factor Setup


The MSLC-2 can send a constant generator power factor setpoint to the DSLC-2s. The power factor reference is
configured in Menu 4 (parameter 5621). The constant generator power factor will be executed, if:
The MSLC-2 runs in base load mode OR
o When in Base load mode, the MSLC-2 can only operate in the constant generator PF mode.
The MSLC-2 runs in export/import mode and the VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) in Menu 4 is
configured to Constant Generator PF.
1.
2.

Set the VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) to Internal. Set the desired constant generator
power factor reference in Menu 4 (parameter 5621).
Run the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system parallel to the utility. For test purposes change between different
constant generator power factors to validate the functionality. When the power factor at the DSLC-2 begins to swing check the settings at the DSLC-2s.

This completes setup of the MSLC-2 constant generator power factor function.

Woodward

Page 119/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

PF Control At The Utility - Setup


The MSLC-2 can regulate a power factor at the interchange point. A PID control compares the power factor reference with the real value and sends a reactive load setpoint to the DSLC-2 to run the error signal to zero. Whatever is sent for reactive load level to the DSLC-2s, the DSLC-2 allows not more than 10% rated vars for leading
and do not allow more than 100% rated vars for lagging.
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

Set the VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) to Internal. Set the VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) to PF Control. Set the desired Power factor reference (parameter 5620) in Menu 4.
An important assumption for setup is the right connection of the CTs of the MSLC-2. Be sure that incoming power is displayed positive (refer to ToolKit Homepage) and incoming lagging reactive power
is displayed positive as well. Do not proceed if you have not clarified the right measurement.
Check Menu 4 setpoints for VAR control proportional gain (parameter 5613), VAR control integral gain
(parameter 5614), VAR control derivative ratio (parameter 5615) whether they are adjusted to their default values.
Switch to base load at the MSLC-2.
Run the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system parallel to the utility. For test purposes change between different
setpoints for the constant generator power factor reference. When the power factor at the DSLC-2 begins
to swing check the settings at the DSLC-2s.
Run a base load and a generator constant power factor with the DSLC-2 which gives the generators the
capability to run the desired power factor at the interchange point. Prepare an import/export control reference which can be maintained by the engines.

NOTE
Do not chose a power factor level if it is not allowed by the utility.
7.
8.

9.

Check that the DIs Voltage Lower and Voltage Raise are not energized and switch the MSLC-2 in
import/export load master control. This is actively done by energizing the DI Imp./Exp. Control.
The MSLC-2 should influence the reactive load of the DSLC-2 so that the desired power factor is
matched at the utility. If the control action is too fast decrease VAR control proportional gain (parameter
5613). If the control action is too slow to bring the PF into control, increase the VAR control proportional gain (parameter 5613). If overshoot of the setpoint occurs, decrease VAR control integral gain (parameter 5614).
Check the regulating behavior by switching several times between base load mode and import/export
control mode and watch the guidance of the power factor by the MSLC-2.

This completes setup of the PF control at the interchange point.

Remote PF Control At The Utility - Setup


Do the following steps if the analog Reactive Load input signal is used. The analog signal can only be used for
the power factor setpoint at the utility.
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.

First do the PF Control At The Utility Setup, before you proceed with this topic.
The value of the remote input needs to be configured and can be viewed in Menu 6. Before you start the
engine check over the displaying field in Menu 6 (parameter 7718) if the analog input is right transformed in a power factor reference value.
Set the VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) to Internal.
The power factor reference will be accepted from the MSLC-2 when the Voltage raise and Voltage
lower commands are given and the MSLC-2 runs in export/import mode and the VAR PF control mode
(parameter 7558) in Menu 4 is configured to PF Control.
Run the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system parallel to the utility. For test purposes change the setpoint over the
analog input to validate the functionality. When the power factor at the utility begins to swing check the
PID settings in the MSLC-2.

This completes setup of the remote PF control at the interchange point.

Page 120/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Var Control At The Utility - Setup


The MSLC-2 can regulate kvars at the interchange point. A PID control compares the kvar reference with the real
value and sends a reactive load setpoint to the DSLC-2 to run the error signal to zero. Whatever is sent for reactive load level to the DSLC-2s, the DSLC-2 allows not more than 10% rated vars for leading and do not allow
more than 100% rated vars for lagging.
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

First do the PF Control At The Utility Setup, before you proceed with the vars.
Set the VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) to Internal. Set the VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) to VAR Control.
Set the desired KVAR reference (parameter 7723) in Menu 4. For a correct and universal regulating configure the rated kvar for the MSLC-2 system. If unknown take the same amount as for the rated active
power (parameter 1752).
An important assumption for setup this mode is the right connection of the CTs of the MSLC-2. Be sure
that incoming power is displayed positive (refer to ToolKit Homepage) and incoming lagging reactive
power is displayed positive as well. Do not proceed if you have not clarified the right measurement.
Check Menu 4 setpoints for VAR control proportional gain (parameter 5613), VAR control integral gain
(parameter 5614), VAR control derivative ratio (parameter 5615) whether they are adjusted to their default values.
Switch to base load at the MSLC-2. Run the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system parallel to the utility. For test
purposes change between different setpoints for the constant generator power factor reference. When the
power factor at the DSLC-2 begins to swing check the settings at the DSLC-2s.
Run a base load and a generator constant power factor with the DSLC-2 which gives the generators the
capability to run the desired kvars at the interchange point. Prepare an import/export control reference
which can be maintained by the engines.

NOTE
Do not chose a var level if it is not allowed by the utility.
8.

Check that the DIs Voltage Lower and Voltage Raise are not energized and switch the MSLC-2 in
import/export load master control. This is actively done by energizing the DI Imp./Exp. Control.
9. At next the MSLC-2 influences the reactive load of the DSLC-2 so that the desired kvars are matched at
the utility. If the control action is too fast decrease VAR control proportional gain (parameter 5613). If
the control action is too slow to bring the var into control, increase the VAR control proportional gain
(parameter 5613). If overshoot of the setpoint occurs, decrease VAR control integral gain (parameter
5614).
10. Check the regulating behavior by switching several times between base load mode and import/export
control mode and watch the guidance of the kvars by the MSLC-2.
This completes var control adjustments.

Woodward

Page 121/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 4.
Synchronizer Description
Introduction

Synchronization is the matching of the output voltage wave form of one synchronous alternating current electrical generator with the voltage wave form of another alternating current electrical system. For the two systems to
be synchronized and connected in parallel, five conditions must be considered:

The number of phases in each system


The direction of rotation of the phases
The voltage amplitudes of the two systems
The frequencies of the two systems
The phase angle of the voltage of the two systems

The first two conditions are determined when the equipment is specified, installed and wired. The synchronizer
matches the remaining conditions (voltage, frequency and phase) before the paralleling breakers are closed.

Functional Description

This section describes how generator and bus matching occurs and how all conditions are verified by the synchronizer functions.The examples shown in chapter Measurement Connections (Examples) on page 124 demonstrate the AC measurement connection and configuration of the MSLC-2 system.

Operating Modes
The operation of the synchronizer is determined by the mode switch as shown in Figure 4-1. The four modes are
Off, Run, Check and Permissive. When the switch is off, the synchronizer is out of operation.
Run mode allows normal synchronizer operation and breaker closure signals. The speed bias signal (explained
below) is maintained throughout the breaker closure signal. When the specified closure signal time has elapsed or
the CB (circuit breaker) aux contact closure signal is received at terminal 47, the synchronizer is disabled. The
synchronizer may optionally be reset automatically when the generator is disconnected from the bus.
Check mode allows normal synchronizing and voltage matching, but does not issue a breaker closure signal.
Permissive mode enables the synch-check function for proper synchronization, but synchronizer operation does
not affect the engine's speed or generator voltage. If phase, frequency and voltage are within proper limits, the
synchronizer issues the breaker closure command. The breaker close command follows the CB close hold time
(3417) setting. It does not stay closed for the complete time you are within the proper limits.

NOTE
In case of power loss, the MCB breaker must be opened manually, because the MSLC-2s output cannot
be energized.

Page 122/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 4-1: Synchronizer block diagram

Woodward

Page 123/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Measurement Connections (Examples)


Low Voltage System 480 V / 277 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase with neutral
System B measurement : L1-L2 (Phase phase)

Figure 4-2: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 480 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 480 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

System A [V] L1
System A [V] L2
System A [V] L3

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 480 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 480 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 480 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 480 V

Systen A [V] L1
Systen A [V] L2
Systen A [V] L3
Systen A [V] L1-L2
Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

OR
System A [V] L1-L2
System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-1: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral

Page 124/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 480 V / 277 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase with neutral
System B measurement : L1-N (Phase neutral)

Figure 4-3: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 480 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 277 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase neutral
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

System A [V] L1
System A [V] L2
System A [V] L3

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 480 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 480 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 480 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 480 V

Systen A [V] L1
Systen A [V] L2
Systen A [V] L3
Systen A [V] L1-L2
Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

OR
System A [V] L1-L2
System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

System B [V] L1
System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-2: Low voltage system 480 V / 277 V 3-phase with neutral

Woodward

Page 125/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 480 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase with neutral
System B measurement : L1-N (Phase neutral)
Auxiliary system B busbar measurement: 3-Phase with neutral

Figure 4-4: Low voltage system 480 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 480 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 277 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase neutral
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): Yes
Aux System B voltage measuring (parameter 1853): 3Ph 4W

System A [V] L1
System A [V] L2
System A [V] L3

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 480 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 480 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 480 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 480 V

Systen A [V] L1
Systen A [V] L2
Systen A [V] L3
Systen A [V] L1-L2
Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

OR
System A [V] L1-L2
System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

System B [V] L1
System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A

Aux System B [V] L1


Aux System B [V] L2
Aux System B [V] L3
Aux System B [V] L1-L2
Aux System B [V] L2-L3
Aux System B [V] L3-L1
Aux System B phase rotation
Aux System B [Hz]
Table 4-3: Low voltage system 480 V 3-phase with neutral
Page 126/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT Open Delta (Phase L2 (B) is grounded at the MSLC-2 connection)
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-L2 (Phase phase)

Figure 4-5: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W OD
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 600 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-4: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase

Woodward

Page 127/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT Open Delta (Phase L2 (B) is grounded at the MSLC-2 connection)
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-N (Phase neutral)

Figure 4-6: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W OD
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 346 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase neutral
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1
System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-5: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase

Page 128/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT Open Delta (Phase L2 (B) is grounded at the MSLC-2 connection)
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-L2 (Phase phase)
Auxiliary system B measurement: 3-Phase Open Delta

Figure 4-7: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W OD
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 600 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): Yes
Aux System B voltage measuring (parameter 1853): 3Ph 3W

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-6: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase

Woodward

Page 129/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT wye (Phase L2 (B) is grounded at the MSLC-2 connection)
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-L2 (Phase phase)

Figure 4-8: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 600 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-7: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Page 130/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT wye (Phase L2 (B) is grounded at the MSLC-2 connection)
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-N (Phase neutral)

Figure 4-9: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 346 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase neutral
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1
System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-8: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Woodward

Page 131/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT wye
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-L2 (Phase phase)
Auxiliary system B measurement: 3-Phase PT wye

Figure 4-10: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 600 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): Yes
Aux System B voltage measuring (parameter 1853): 3Ph 4W

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-9: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Page 132/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Low Voltage System 600 V / 346 V - 3-Phase with Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT wye
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-N (Phase neutral)
Auxiliary system B measurement: 3-Phase PT wye

Figure 4-11: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 600 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 4W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 346 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase neutral
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): Yes
Aux System B voltage measuring (parameter 1853): 3Ph 4W

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 600 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 120 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 600 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 120 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1
System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-10: Low voltage system 600 V / 346 V 3-phase with neutral

Woodward

Page 133/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Middle Voltage System 20 kV - 3-Phase without Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT Open Delta
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-L2

Figure 4-12: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 20000 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 3W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 20000 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): No

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 20000 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 115 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 20000 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 115 V

Voltage Monitoring

Systen A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L1-L2
Systen A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
System A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A
Table 4-11: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral

Page 134/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Middle Voltage System 20 kV - 3-Phase without Neutral

Phase rotation clockwise


System A measurement: 3-Phase PT Open Delta
System B measurement: 1-Phase PT L1-L2
Auxiliary system B measurement: 3-Phase PT Open Delta

Figure 4-13: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral

Configuration

Measurement

Voltage Monitoring

Menu 5
System A rated voltage (parameter 1766): 20000 V
System A current input (parameter 1850): L1 L2 L3
System A voltage measuring (parameter 1851): 3Ph 3W
System B rated voltage (parameter 1781): 20000 V
1Ph2W voltage input (parameter 1858): Phase phase
1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859): CW
Auxiliary Sytem B available (parameter 7629): Yes
Aux System B voltage measuring (parameter 1853): 3Ph 3W

System A [V] L1-L2


System A [V] L2-L3
System A [V] L3-L1

Transformer
System A PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1801): 20000 V
System A PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1800): 115 V
System B PT primary rated voltage (parameter 1804): 20000 V
System B PT secondary rated volt. (parameter 1803): 115 V

Systen A [V] L1-L2


Systen A [V] L2-L3
Systen A [V] L3-L1
Systen A [A] L1
Systen A [A] L2
Systen A [A] L3
Systen A [kW]
Systen A [KVA]
Systen A [kvar]
Systen A [PF] L1
Systen A [PF] L2
Systen A [PF] L3
Systen A [Hz]
Systen A Phase rotation

System B [V] L1-L2


System B [Hz]
Phase-Angle
System B-A

Aux System B [V] L1-L2


Aux System B [V] L2-L3
Aux System B [V] L3-L1
Aux System B phase rotation
Aux System B [Hz]
Table 4-12: Middle voltage system 20 kV 3-phase without neutral

Woodward

Page 135/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Dead Bus Closing Multiple Units


When a dead bus is detected and dead bus closing mode is Enabled, the MSLC-2 is doing a security check before issuing a breaker closure command. This security is required to prevent two or more units from closing their
breakers at the same time.
To provide this security, the active MSLC-2 is listening on the network, if any other DSLC-2 or MSLC-2 wants
already close its breaker:
If yes, the active MSLC-2 cancels the wish for breaker closure, remains passive and still listen on the
network, if the situation changes.
If no, the active MSLC-2 publish a close wish on the network and listen, if there is any other control
wish to close its breaker. Three scenarios are now possible:
Scenario 1: No other control announces a close desire within the next 500 ms. After
that the MSLC-2 closes its breaker.
Scenario 2: No other control with a smaller Device-ID announces a desire for dead
bus closure within the next 500 ms. After that the MSLC-2 closes its breaker.
Scenario 3: Another control with a smaller Device-ID announces a desire for dead bus
closure, so the MSLC-2 cancels the wish for breaker closure, remains passive and still
listen on the network, if the situation changes.

NOTE
The DSLC-2s have more priority for dead bus closure as the MSLC-2s. In other words: If a DSLC-2
wishes to close the GCB on a dead busbar the MSLC-2s are blocked.

Figure 4-14: Dead bus closing Example of dead busbar closure arbitration

Page 136/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Voltage Matching
The voltages of two systems in parallel must be matched within a small percentage to minimize the reactive power flow in the system. If a local plant is paralleled to the main grid with unequal voltages, the local plant will, in
most cases, follow the utility voltage.The difference in voltages results in reactive currents flowing in the system
with subsequent lowered system efficiency.
If the system is initially at a lower voltage than the utility, reactive power will be absorbed by the system. If the
system voltage was initially higher, the local plant will provide extra reactive power to the utility. In either case
the breaker across which the parallel is made will experience unnecessary wear and tear created by the arcing
across different voltages.
The MSLC-2 measures the RMS values of the voltages. The synchronizer issues appropriate raise or lower commands, or voltage bias adjustment to all of the DSLC-2 controls over the Ethernet network. The MSLC-2 will
continue this process until the difference between system B and system A voltage is within a specified window.
The automatic voltage matching function may be enabled or disabled with a configuration setpoint. When
enabled, voltage matching will occur in both the Check and Run modes and is verified to be within the window in the Permissive mode.

Phase Matching Synchronizing


The phase matching synchronizer mode corrects the frequency and phase of the system A to lock it to the system
B frequency and phase. Phase matching synchronizing can be configured (parameter 5730) in the unit. With activation of the synchronizer the MSLC-2 begins to control at first the frequency to minimize the frequency difference between system B and system A. When the frequency window comes into the range of phase matching start,
see configuration Phase matching df-start (parameter 5506), the synchronizer watches the phase relation. Therefore the frequency setpoint to the DSLC-2 increases or decreases and result in speed biasing to the engine depending on whether the slip is faster or slower than the system A. Proportional and integral gain adjustments are
provided to allow stable operation of the automatic synchronizer over a wide range of system dynamics.

Slip Frequency Synchronizing


In certain applications the initial power flow can be either from or to the utility. Depending on the requirement,
the local bus can be brought into parallel with a slightly higher or lower frequency than the mains. This can be
provided by the parameter Slip frequency setpoint offset (parameter 4712). The slip frequency method is configured by the configuration Synchronization CB (parameter 5730). The synchronizer automatically controls the
connected generator at the specified slip frequency. The MSLC-2 outputs an error signal over the network to the
DSLC-2 controls to change their bias on the speed controls. Gain and stability adjustments to the slip frequency
proportional and integral gain controller are provided to allow stable operation of the automatic synchronizer
function over a wide range of system dynamics (parameter 4539, parameter 4540).

Permissive Mode / Synch-Check Function


The synch-check function determines when frequency, phase and voltage are within the configured settings for
proper synchronization before issuing a breaker closure command. The Setpoint frequency (parameter 4627) and
Setpoint voltage (parameter 4628) are not used to drive system B into synchronization. The MSLC-2 can be manually controlled using the setpoint raise/ lower and voltage raise/ lower discrete inputs. The system A and system B voltage comparison is made independent of the voltage matching function being enabled. When all conditions of voltage and phase are met, then the breaker closure command is given for the CB close hold time
(parameter 3417), then will wait the Reclose delay (parameter 4534) time and if the proper synchronization settings are still met, will issue another breaker closure command.

Woodward

Page 137/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

GCB Maximun Closing Attempts


The synchronizer allows multiple breaker closure attempts to an active or dead bus. The control provides setpoints for the number of close attempts (parameter 3419) and the reclosure delay timing (parameter 4534). The
synchronizer feature has 2 alarms, Reclose limit alarm (parameter 7556) and the Synchronizer timeout alarm (parameter 7557). These alarms will effect the synchronizer differently between an active or dead bus.
Dead bus closing
If both alarms are disabled, you will receive infinite breaker closure attempts. If one or both alarms are enabled,
when that alarm setting is reached, an alarm is received and no more breaker close attempts will be given. This is
important when you have multiple utilities attempting to close to a dead bus. The MSLC-2 that receives the dead
bus token, will not pass the dead bus token until it receives an alarm. So having 1 or 2 close attempts is preferred
in a multiple utilityapplication.
Active bus closing
If both alarms are disabled, you will receive infinite breaker closure attempts. If one or both alarms are enabled,
when that alarm setting is reached, an alarm is received but the synchronizer will keep providing breaker closure
commands until a CB Aux feedback is received or the Run or Permissive input is removed.

Auto re-synchronization
The Auto re-synchronization feature (parameter 7514), when enabled, allows the MSLC-2 to attempt to reclose
the breaker if the CB Aux feedback is opened and the MSLC-2 still has a Run or Permissive input closed.
The auto re-synchronizer feature becomes active after a successful breaker closure is received. Then if the breaker feedback (CB Aux) is opened and the Run or Permissive input is still closed, the MSLC-2 will attempt to
close the breaker when in the synchronizer specifications. If configured for Disabled, no attempt at synchronization will be made until the Run or Permissive input is then opened and reclosed. This is active even when a
utility unload command is given and the MSLC-2 opens the breaker. With auto re-synchronization Enabled, the
synchronizer will become active.

NOTE
Woodward suggest to remove the Run or Permissive input after a successful breaker closure has
been re-ceived and have the Run or Permissive input reclosed if the breaker opens and it is safe to
reclose it.

Reclose limit alarm


When the Reclose limit alarm (parameter 7556) is Enabled an independent monitor counts in the background
the number of close attempts. When the number of close attempts matches the configurable number of closing attempts (parameter 3419) an alarm flag will be issued. This alarm flag is automatically considered when a dead
busbar closure is executed. When during the dead busbar closure, the reclose limit alarm becomes active, the
dead busbar closure permission will be passed to another MSLC-2. If the Reclose limit alarm (parameter 7556) is
Disabled, the MSLC-2 will have an infinite number of attempts to close the breaker.

Synchronizer Timer
The synchronizer function is equipped with three adjustable timers.
1.
2.
3.

The CB close hold time (parameter 3417) determines the amount of time the control maintains the
breaker close command.
The Synchronizer timeout (parameter 3063) when the Synchronizer timeout alarm (parameter 7557) is
Enabled. The alarm is removable by de-energized run and permissive signal.
The Reclose delay (parameter 4534) which is the time delay between the single close commands.

When Enabled the synchronizer timer starts when the Run switch is closed. It is not active in the check or
permissive modes. If no breaker closure is received by the end of the timer, a synchronizer timeout alarm is received and the MSLC-2 will stop the synchronizing process. If the Run input is removed, the alarm is reset and
when the Run input is closed the synchronizer process will be active.

Page 138/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Logic Charter GCB Closure

Figure 4-15: Logic charter CB closure

Woodward

Page 139/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Manual Synchronizing

The manual synchronizer is activated / deactivated under the following conditions.


Activated
MCB/tie-breaker = open
AND
DI Setpoint Raise
OR
DI Setpoint Lower
OR
DI Voltage Raise
OR
DI Voltage Lower

Deactivated
Breaker feedback DI CB Aux =
closed
OR
Synchronization Run
OR
Synchronization Check
OR
Synchronization Permissive

The MSLC-2 is before and during the manual synchronization in Load control mode (parameter 4603) Off
Line, and in the Synchronizer mode (parameter 4602) Off, independent if the MSLC-2 is configured to utilitiy
or tie.

Frequency Setpoint
It is possible with discrete input Setpoint Raise or discrete input Setpoint Lower to adjust the Setpoint frequency (parameter 4627) of connected DSLCs, which are in the same segment, up and down (ramp rate fixed to
0.01 Hz/s). The setpoint frequency is the direct output of the parameter Setpoint frequency (parameter 4627) is
transferred in Hz to the DSLCs. The setpoint frequency is limited due to the parameters Upper frequency limit
(parameter 5802) and Lower frequency limit (paramater 5803). The operating ranges of these parameters are adjustable in Menu 5.

Upper frequency limit (parameter 5802) | Range: 100 to 150 % | Default: 110 % = 66 Hz (with rated frequency = 60 Hz)
Lower frequency limit (parameter 5803) | Range: 50 to 100 % | Default: 90 % = 54 Hz (with rated frequency = 60 Hz)

NOTE
Frequency setpoint DSLC-2:
Received via parameter Setpoint frequency (parameter 4627) | Range: 54 to 66 Hz (limited 90 to 110 %
from rated frequency, for example 60 Hz)

Voltage Setpoint
It is possible with discrete input Voltage Raise or discrete input Voltage Lower to adjust the Setpoint voltage
(parameter 4628) of connected DSLCs, which are in the same segment, up and down (ramp rate fixed to 0.05
%/s). The setpoint voltage is the direct output of the parameter Setpoint voltage (parameter 4628) is transferred in
% to the DSLCs. The setpoint frequency is limited due to the parameters Upper voltage limit (parameter 5800)
and Lower voltage limit (paramater 5801). The operating ranges of these parameters are adjustable in Menu 5.

Upper voltage limit (parameter 5800) | Range: 100 to 150 % | Default: 110 % = 66 Hz (of rated voltage)
Lower voltage limit (parameter 5801) | Range: 50 to 100 % | Default: 90 % = 66 Hz (of rated voltage)

NOTE
Voltage setpoint DSLC-2:
Received via parameter Setpoint voltage (parameter 4628) | Range: 90 to 110 % (limited 80 to 120 %
from rated voltage)

Page 140/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Breaker Close
The MCB/tie-breaker can be closed manually when system B frequency and voltage are in range.

CAUTION
The rotation field of system A and system B must be measured. They must have the same direction
CW or CCW.

Reset Frequency / Voltage Setpoints Back To Rated (50 Hz or 60 Hz)

MSLC-2 configured as utility breaker control: MCB/tie-breaker = closed and breaker feedback mains
parallel operation
MSLC-2 configured as tie-breaker control: Manual synchronizer = off and MCB/tie-breaker = closed

Woodward

Page 141/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 5.
Real Power Control Description
Introduction

The MSLC-2 control provides several modes of generator load operation. These are:
Base loading
o Automatic control of generators kW and constant generator PF control
Import/export level control
o Automatic control of the systems import or export power and either var or power factor control
or constant generator PF control
Process control
o Automatic control of a process signal with either var or power factor control or constant generator PF control
Utility unload
o The ability to transfer the system load from the utility to the generators with the utility breaker
being opened at the Utility unload trip (parameter 4506) level

MSLC-2 / DSLC-2 Interface

The MSLC-2 is able to control load and reactive load with only active DSLC-2 controls which are connected to
the same bus segment and are in the load sharing mode. DSLC-2s that are in base load or process control cannot
be controlled by a MSLC-2. The MSLC-2 can synchronize multiple DSLC-2s to the utility. Once the utility
breaker is closed, the MSLC-2 must be placed in a load control mode. These are base load, import/export process
control or utility unload. MSLC-2s in the tie-breaker mode will synchronize and close the tie-breaker to connect
different bus segments but will not have any load control capabilities.

NOTE
The DSLC-2 will show it is in the base load mode (parameter 4603) when being controlled by a MSLC-2.

Base Load Mode

The MSLC-2 takes the system load percentage immediately upon entering the base load mode for the initial base
load reference setting. This is true when synchronizing to the utility or transferring from import/export mode to
base load. The base load reference can be moved by using the setpoint Raise or Lower discret inputs with an
option to use the remote analog input to control the reference. The DSLC-2 controls will maintain the system
load percentage being provided by the MSLC-2 with the utility picking up all load swings. Using the setpoint
lower input will decrease the system load percentage, thus unloading the generators and transferring the load to
the utility. The MSLC-2 has a Generator unload trip (parameter 3125) level that activates the Lcl. / generator
breaker open relay. This ouput can be used to open a group breaker or to signal the DSLC-2s to open the generator breaker. This breaker stays active for 400 milliseconds. When in base load control the reactive power control
will automatically be the constant generator PF mode. While unloading the kW of the generators you will need to
unload the reactive power. The MSLC-2 will change the constant generator PF control reference to 1.0 when the
system load percentage reaches the Generator unload trip (parameter 3125) setpoint.

Page 142/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Import / Export Mode

The MSLC-2 measures the real power flow to or from the main power grid. It then controls all active DSLC-2s
by controlling the system load percentage signal. The individual DSLC-2 controls will control to this percentage
of their rated loads and the MSLC-2 will adjust this system load up or down to achieve the proper import/export
level. The system load percentage is limited to a 0 to 100% signal so that overload or reverse power of the generators will never occur. When in import / export mode the PID control is located in Menu 2. The DSLC-2 controls are using the base load PID (Menu 2) to control at the reference signal being sent from the MSLC-2. The
reactive power can be configured for var, PF, or constant generator PF control.

NOTE
Any DSLC-2 set for base loading will maintain its individually set base load, regardless of the MSLC-2
signal. Therefore, a sufficient number of generators must be in isochronous load sharing in order to
handle plant load swings and still maintain the import/export level. The DSLC-2s Load control mode
(parameter 4603) will indicate base load mode when being controlled by the MSLC-2.

Process Control Mode

The MSLC-2 controls the DSLC-2 equipped generators by adjusting the system load. The MSLC-2 will control
the system load to maintain the process input signal is equal to the process reference The MSLC-2 is limited to
changing the reference signal to the DSLC-2 controls between 0 and 100%. The reactive power can be configured
for var, PF, or constant generator PF control.

Remote Control

In any of the above modes, the reference can be determined by an analog signal input at terminals 83 to 85. The
remote mode is selected by activating both the setpoint raise and lower at the same time. Menu 6 determines the
scaling and the engineering units. The remote load reference signal can be a base load, import / export or a
process control value.
The reactive load analog input at terminals 89 to 91 can be used for a power factor setpoint control or a constant
generator power factor control reference. Menu 6 determines the scaling.

Automatic Power Transfer Control Functions

Ramping Between Modes


Whenever the mode of load control is changed, the MSLC-2 will ramp at a user chosen rate until it is within 5%
of its new reference. Then, it will begin dynamic control. This provides smooth (bumpless) transitions between
all modes.

Utility Unload
The utility unload feature is available with the MSLC-2 in base load, import / export or process mode. When the
utility unload command is issued, the MSLC-2 will adjust the Setpoint load level (parameter 4629) until a specified level around the zero power transfer point is obtained. It will then issue a utility breaker open command. The
Utility unload trip (parameter 4506) determines at which power value the tolerance for opening the breaker is
reached. If the local plant is initially operating at some export level, supplying power to the utility, the MSLC-2
Woodward

Page 143/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

will lower the system load setpoint to obtain a zero power transfer condition. If the local plant is initially operating at some import level, absorbing power from the utility, the MSLC-2 will raise the system load setpoint to obtain a zero power transfer condition. If the MSLC-2 cannot bring the import/export level within the chosen band
prior to reaching a system load setpoint of 0% or 100%, the unload will stop and if enabled the appropriate
high/low limit alarms will activate. When the Utility unload trip time (parameter 3123) is reached the breaker will
be opened independent on the trip level.

Local Unload
When the MSLC-2 is in base load mode and the setpoint lower command is continuously activated, the control
will lower the Setpoint load level (parameter 4629), which is sent to the DSLC-2s. When the system level reaches
the Generator unload trip (parameter 3125) level, the Lcl. / generator breaker open relay will energize. This relay
will energize for 400 milliseconds. This will transfer the plant load back to the utility power grid. During unloading, the MSLC-2 is in the constant generator PF mode. When the Generator unload trip (parameter 3125) level is
reached, the MSLC-2 will change the contant generator PF level to 1.0.

Off Line
Base Load
Base Load Raise
Base Load Lower
Base Load 1
Remote
Utility Unload 2
Local Unload 3
Ramp Pause 4
Import/
Export mode
I/E Raise
I/E Lower
I/E Remote 1
Process Control
Process Raise
Process Lower
Process Remote 1

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

DI

CB AUX

Utility
Unload

Base Load

Imp/Exp
Control

Process
Control

Ramp Pause

Setpoint
Raise

Setpoint
Lower

0
1
1
1
1

x
0
0
0
0

x
1
1
1
1

x
0
0
0
0

x
0
0
0
0

x
0
0
0
0

x
0
1
0
1

x
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
0
x
0

x
1
x
x

x
0
x
1

x
0
x
0

0
0
1
0

x
0
x
0

x
1
x
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

1
1
1
x
x
x
x

0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Table 5-1: Load control modes MSLC-2

NOTE
1

Remote reference is activated by closing both setpoint raise and setpoint lower switches at the same
time.

The MSLC-2 can only load the associated generators to 100%. If this is not enough capacity to unload
the utility, the unload ramps stops at 100% rated load on the associated generators. The generator high
limit alarm, if enabled, will activate at this time.
3

The local plant unload is accomplished by switching to base load mode and supplying a continuous
setpoint lower command.

The ramp pause command will pause all ramps in any mode.

Page 144/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 6.
Var/Power Factor Control Description
Introduction

The MSLC-2 offers 3 modes of reactive power control. Var or power factor modes will control the reactive power at the utility breaker while constant generator PF control will provide a power factor setpoint to all DSLC-2
controls on the system.
When a utility unload command is issued, the control automatically shifts from var control to power factor control in order to ensure a minimum amount of current flow across the utility tie when it is opened. It is important to
note that, as with the real load functions, the var/PF control in the MSLC-2 controls only those DSLC-2 controls
which are in isochronous load sharing. Any DSLC-2 controls which are in base load mode will control the reactive power on their associated generators in accordance with their own internal reference and chosen mode of
var/PF control.

Constant Generator Power Factor

The MSLC-2 sets the power factor reference of the generators according to the value chosen by:

Base Configuration: VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) configured to Constant Generator PF
and reference value Constant gen. PF reference (parameter 5621).
ToolKit: Changing the Constant gen. PF reference (parameter 5621) in ToolKit will change the reference value being controlled.
Adaptation: With the settings of the base configuration the constant gen PF reference can be influenced
by voltage raise and voltage lower commands.
Remote: With the settings of the base configuration the Constant gen PF reference (parameter 5621)
can be influenced by an analog signal (Reactive Load Input). The voltage raise and voltage lower signal must be energized simultaneously.
Interface: With the settings of the base configuration the Constant gen PF reference (parameter 5621)
can be influenced by interface, when the configuration VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) is
set to Interface.
Control: The DSLC-2s PID var control will effect the stability of the power factor control.

Woodward

Page 145/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Power Factor Control

The MSLC-2 adjusts the power factor references of the generators in order to maintain a chosen power factor
level across the utility tie. The MSLC-2 sends a system reactive power percentage value to the DSLC-2s. Following procedures are possible:

Base Configuration: VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) configured to PF Control and Power
factor reference (parameter 5620) is configured.
ToolKit: Changing the Power factor reference (parameter 5620) in ToolKit will change the reference
value being controlled.
Remote: With the settings of the base configuration the Power factor reference (parameter 5620) at the
MSLC-2 can be influenced by an analog signal (Reactive Load Input). The voltage raise and voltage
lower signal must be energized simultaneously.
Interface: With the settings of the base configuration the Power factor reference (parameter 5620) at
the MSLC-2 can be influenced by interface, when the configuration VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) is set to Interface.
Control: The PID var control setting in the MSLC-2, Menu 4, will effect the stability of the power factor control.

Var Control

The MSLC-2 adjusts the power factor reference of the generators in order to maintain a chosen var level across
the utility tie. The MSLC-2 sends a system reactive power percentage value to the DSLC-2s. The unit allows only
one basic setting:

Base Configuration: VAR PF control mode (parameter 7558) configured to VAR Control and KVAR
reference (parameter 7723) is configured.
ToolKit: Changing the KVAR reference (parameter 7723) in ToolKit will change the reference value being controlled.
Control: The PID var control settings in the MSLC-2, Menu 4, will effect the stability of the var control.

Page 146/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 7.
Process Control Description
Introduction

The process control function of the MSLC-2 will control any process where the controlled parameter is determined by the load on the local generators and the controlled parameter can be monitored as as an analog input
signal (process input). The control compares the input signal to the process reference setpoint, or the remote reference if used and adjusts the local generator loading to maintain the desired setpoint.

NOTE
The MSLC-2 system load command is obeyed only by the associated DSLC-2 controls which are in
isochronous load sharing. DSLC-2s in Base load or process control mode will ignore the MSLC-2 load
command signal and maintain its set load reference. The DSLC-2s Load Control mode (parameter 4603)
will display Base load mode when being controlled by a MSLC-2.

Description

Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the process control function. The process control mode is selected when the
Process Controland CB Aux switch contacts are closed. The process input signal is compared with the
process reference, which may be either the internal Process reference (parameter 4605) or the analog remote
process reference input (Configurable in Menu 6). In process control mode, the Load Raise and Load Lower
contact inputs operate on the process control reference. When the internal reference is used, the Load Raise and
Load Lower contacts raise and lower the process reference based on the internal Process reference (parameter
4605). The analog remote reference input becomes active on the process reference, when both the Load Raise
and Load Lower contacts are closed.
Each time a new process control begins, the first error signal is checked. If the process error signal is higher than
5% or lower than -5% the generator load is guided over a ramp function to leveling the error signal. This shall be
a relatively smooth process. When the error signal resides within +/-5% the Process PID function becomes active.
The process PID function also becomes active, if the ramp function has reached the minimum or the maximum
gen load level (0 to 100%). If the process PID is one time activated, it remains active until the process control is
switched off or the CB gets open.
When the process control is enabled, the PID controller operates in cascade with the load control. The output of
the controller is a generator load reference within the range 0 to 100 % rated power to prevent overload or reverse
power on the generator. The load setting signal is output from the load control to the speed control to set control
at the required load to maintain the desired process level. An additional feature of the process control is the adjustable process input signal filter. The adjustable Process filter, Menu 3 (parameter 4509) allows reducing
bandwidth when controlling a noisy process such as experienced in digester gas fuel applications. The process
control function is configurable for direct and inverse action. Direct process control is where the sensed input
signal increases as the load increases (such as where the sensed input is exhaust pressure or export power). An
inverse action control is where the sensed input signal decreases as the load increases (such as when controlling
import power where the import power will decrease as the generating system picks up more of the local load).
The process error is the difference between process signal input and process reference. The controller in the
MSLC-2 regulates the percentage values. For a better understanding the engineering unit can be displayed according to the percentage value. Therefore the scaling of the percentage value is to make with according engineering units (parameter 7732, parameter 7733 and parameter 7734). The units are then displayed in fields parameter 7726 and parameter 7727 in Menu 6 or the Homepage.
Woodward

Page 147/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

The Process signal input (parameter 10151) and the Remote reference input (parameter 10117) is displayed in
Menu 6 in %.
The resulting Process reference (parameter 4605) and the resulting Process signal input (parameter 4600) is displayed in the Homepage in %.

Page 148/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 7-1: Diagram process control

Woodward

Page 149/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 8.
Network / System Description
Introduction

The new DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system provides within one network following features:

The maximum number of DSLC-2s (Generator) can go up to 32.


The maximum number of MSLC-2s (Utility- or Tie-breaker) can go up to 16.
The maximum number of segments is 8.

The DSLC-2 still cares about the generator breaker and the MSLC-2 cares about utility breaker or a tie-breaker.
The DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 can reside at different segments. A segment is defined as the smallest undividable bar
in a system. Segment connectors inform the DSLC-2s and MSLC-2s which generators and utilities are connected.
Through the segmenting the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 can recognize all the time with which other units they are interconnected. So the DSLC-2s in the same segment are load share together or doing an independent load control.
The MSLC-2s can be configured to utility breaker mode or to tie-breaker mode. In each case it is only allowed to
have one MSLC-2 in one segment running as master control. A MSLC-2 gets a master control when base load
control, export/import control or process control is activated. If multiple MSLC-2s are in the same segment, the
control with the lowest device number will be master.

Description

Beside the upper described restrictions there are existing additional rules for the successful operation of the
DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system. Please read this rules and compare it with your planned application.

The segment numbers have to follow a line, which can finally be closed to a ring. A segment branch is
not allowed.
There can be placed several MSLC-2 in one segment, but only one MSLC-2 can run as Master control.
The generator is not counted as a segment.
The utility is not counted as a segment.

At next will be shown some examples of applications for a better understanding the philosophy of the segmenting.

Applications Without Segmenting


In some applications there is no segmenting to make because the common busbar of DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 cannot be separated. In this case in Menu 5, Basic segment number (parameter 4544) is configured to 1 at each unit.
The Device number (parameter 1702) needs still to be different because it determines the network addressing. See
Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 for examples which need no segmenting.

Page 150/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 8-1: Multiple generators in isolated operation without tie-breakers

Figure 8-2: Multiple generators in isolated / parallel to utility operation without tie-breakers

Applications With Segmenting


The segmenting is to make in each application where the common busbar can be separated into two or more segments. The segment numbers have to follow a line and shall not branch. The information which segments are
connected coming by discrete inputs terminals 141 to 148. All DSLC-2 and MSLC-2 have the same discrete inputs to control the segmenting. The 8 segment connection feedbacks are over-all the same and are logically ORed
to each other. The information is exchanged over network. In all these cases in Menu 5, Basic segment number
(parameter 4544) of each unit is configured according to the location of the unit. The rules for setting up the segment numbers are shown in chapter Prestart Setup Procedure on page 105.
At next are shown some examples which are covered by the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system.

Woodward

Page 151/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 8-3: Isolated operation with multiple generator and tie-breaker

Figure 8-4: Isolated / utility parallel operation with multiple generator and tie-breaker

Page 152/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 8-5: Isolated / utility parallel operation with multiple generator, tie-breaker and generator group breaker

Figure 8-5 shows an application with 2 utility feeder breaker, 2 load segments and 2 generator group breaker. The
segment line begins at the left side with the load A segment (segment no.1) and ends with the load B segment
(segment no.4) at the right side.

Figure 8-6: Isolated operation with multiple generator and tie-breaker (ring option)

Figure 8-6 shows an application with multiple generators connectable to a ring with tie-breaker. However segments are in use, the last not used segment connectors are be bridged as closed at one of the units.
Woodward

Page 153/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Not Supported Applications


A main rule in the segmenting is that segment numbers have to follow a line without branches. At next are shown
some application examples which are not covered by the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system. The application in Figure
8-7 and Figure 8-8 shows how the segment number line can branch. Another indication is the need for a segment
breaker between segment 3 and 5, which does not exists.

Figure 8-7: Not supported application

Figure 8-8: Not supported application

Page 154/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Remote Control by PLC

The DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system offers two channels of Ethernet and one channel serial interface RS-485. Ethernet
channel A is the dedicated communication bus for the Woodward own UDP message system, which is used to
exchange information between all units in the network. In Menu 5.1 the Network A UDP TCP/IP address
(parameter 5330) has to be configured for. Each unit gets its own address usually related to the own Device number (parameter 1702).
Ethernet channel B can be used for visualization and remote control of all units. The protocol here used is Modbus/TCP. In Menu 5.1 the Network B Modbus TCP/IP address (parameter 5430) has to be configured for.
Each unit gets its own address usually related to the own Device number (parameter 1702).
Additionally the unit offers a serial RS-485 connection for visualization and remote control. The visualization can
be done simultaneously by Ethernet and RS-485. In Menu 5.1 the Modbus Serial Interface 2 Modbus slave ID
(parameter 3188) has to be configured for. Each unit gets its own slave ID usually related to the own Device
number (parameter 1702).
The remote control has to be configured for either RS-485 or Ethernet. Furthermore the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 allows distribute functions to discrete inputs and to protocol bits.

Interface Connection Via RS-485 With Modbus Protocol


The DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system provides a RS-485 Modbus connection. Each unit gets an own Modbus slave address. The DSLC-2 as the MSLC-2 allows to configure each parameter or to inform about each measurement value and binary information. For visualization the unit offers a special mapped Modbus table with all important
values refer to Data Protocol 5200 on page 179.

Figure 8-9: Visualization and remote control by PLC via RS-485 interface

Woodward

Page 155/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Interface Connection Via Ethernet By Modbus/TCP Stack


The DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 system provides the Ethernet channel B for Modbus/TCP connection. Each unit gets an
own Modbus slave address. The DSLC-2 as the MSLC-2 allows to configure each parameter or to inform about
each measure.

Figure 8-10: Visualization and remote control by PLC via Ethernet Modbus/TCP interface

Page 156/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Chapter 9.
Interface

Interface Overview

The device has several communication interfaces which are described below.

Figure 9-1: MSLC-2 - interface overview (housing - side view)


Number
1
2
3
4

Labeled
Network A
Network B
RS-485
RS-232

CANbus #1

Protocol
UDP
TCP/IP
Modbus (Protocol 5200)
ToolKit (ServLink)
Modbus (Protocol 5200)
For internal use only

Table 9-1: MSLC-2 - Interfaces - overview

RS-232 Serial Interface (Interface #1)


A freely configurable RS-232 interface is provided to serve as a local service interface for configuring the unit
and visualize measured data. It is possible to connect a modem for remote control and alarm signaling. The serial
interface 1 provides a ServLink as well as a Modbus protocol.

RS-485 Serial Interface (Interface #2)


A freely configurable RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave interface is provided to add PLC connectivity. It is also possible to configure the unit, visualize measured data and alarm messages and control the unit remotely.

RJ-45 Ethernet Interfaces (Network A, Network B)


Standard Ethernet ports for device interconnection (Network A UDP Protocol) and PLC connection
(Network B TCP/IP Protocol).

Woodward

Page 157/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Ethernet Load Sharing

Multi-Master Principle
It is important to know that the load share and load-dependent start/stop functionality is subject to a multi-master
principle. This means that there is no dedicated master and slave function. Each MSLC-2 decides for itself how it
has to behave. The benefit is that there is no master control, which may cause a complete loss of this functionality
in case it fails. Each control is also responsible for controlling common breakers like a mains circuit or generator
group breaker.

Load Share Monitoring


The MSLC-2 provides the following monitoring function for load sharing:

Multi-Unit Missing Members


The multi-unit missing members monitoring function checks whether all participating units are available (sending
data on the Ethernet line).

Switches
Please use a 10/100 Mit/s Ethernet switch if more then two devices should be connected.

General Load Share Information


The maximum number of participating DSLC-2 devices for load sharing is 32. The maximum number of
MSLC-2 devices is 16.
The following parameters affect the bus load:
Baud rate
Transfer rate of load share messages
Visualization

Page 158/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Modbus Communications

General Information
Modbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon in 1979 for use with its programmable logic
controllers (PLCs). It has become a de facto standard communications protocol in industry and is now the most
commonly available means of connecting industrial electronic devices. The DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 supports a Modbus RTU Slave module. This means that a Master node needs to poll the slave node. Modbus RTU can also be
multi-dropped, or in other words, multiple Slave devices can exist on one Modbus RTU network, assuming that
the serial interface is a RS-485. Detailed Information about the Modbus protocol are available on the following
website:
http://www.modbus.org/specs.php
There are also various tools available on the internet. We recommend to use ModScan32 which is a Windows application designed to operate as a Modbus Master device for accessing data points in a connected Modbus Slave
device. It is designed primarily as a testing device for verification of correct protocol operation in new or existing
systems. It is possible to download a trial version from the following website:
http://www.win-tech.com/html/modscan32.htm

Woodward

Page 159/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Address Range
The DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 Modbus Slave module distinguishes between visualization data and configuration & remote control data. The different data is accessible over a split address range and can be read via the "Read Holding Register" function. Furthermore, the parameters and remote control data can be written with the "Preset Single Registers" function or "Preset Multiple Registers" (refer to Table 9-2).
Modbus
function codes:

Modbus
address:
DSLC-2 / MSLC-2
visualization data

Read Holding Register (0x03)

450001
450000

40001

DSLC-2 / MSLC-2

Read Holding Register (0x03)

remote control
&
configuration data

Preset Multiple Registers (0x10)


Preset Single Register (0x06)

Table 9-2: Modbus - address range

NOTE
All addresses in this document comply with the Modicon address convention. Some PLCs or PC programs use different address conventions depending on their implementation. Then the address must
be increased and the leading 4 may be omitted.
Please refer to your PLC or program manual for more information. This determines the address sent
over the bus in the Modbus telegram. The Modbus starting address 450001 of the visualization data
may become bus address 50000 for example.

Page 160/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Visualization
The visualization over Modbus is provided in a very fast data protocol where important system data like alarm
states, AC measurement data, switch states and various other information may be polled. According to the
DSLC-2 / MSCL-2 Modbus addressing range, the visualization protocol can be reached on addresses starting at
450001. On this address range it is possible to do block reads from 1 up to 128 Modbus registers at a time.
Modbus Read
Addresses
450001
450002
............
............
............
............
450171

Description
Protocol-ID, always 5200
Scaling power
.........
.........
.........
.........
Remote load reference
input

Multiplier

Units

.....
.....
.....
.....
0.1

--.....
.....
.....
.....
kW

Table 9-3: Modbus - address range block read

NOTE
Table 9-3 is only an excerpt of the data protocol. It conforms to the data protocol 5200 that is also used
by Ethernet. Refer to Data Protocol 5200 on page 179 for the complete protocol.

The following ModScan32 screenshot shows the configurations made to read the visualization protocol with a
block read of 128 registers.

Figure 9-2: Modbus - visualization configurations

Woodward

Page 161/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Configuration
The Modbus interface can be used to read/write parameters of the DSLC-2 / MSLC-2. According to the
DSLC-2 / MSLC-2 Modbus addressing range for the configuration addresses, the range starts at 40001 and ends
at 450000. You can always access only one parameter of the system in this address range. The Modbus address
can be calculated depending on the parameter ID as illustrated below:
Modbus address =

Parameter ID < 10000


40000 + (Par. ID+1)

Parameter ID >= 10000


400000 + (Par. ID+1)

Table 9-4: Modbus - address calculation

Block reads in this address range depend on the data type of the parameter. This makes it important to set the correct length in Modbus registers which depends on the data type (UNSIGNED 8, INTEGER 16, etc.). Refer to Table 9-5 for more information.
Device
types

Modbus
registers

UNSIGNED 8
UNSIGNED 16
INTEGER 16
UNSIGNED 32
INTEGER 32
LOGMAN
TEXT/X

1
1
1
2
2
7
X/2

Table 9-5: Modbus - data types

Page 162/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

MSLC-2 Interface Remote Control


For a remote setting of the control setpoints, it is necessary to use the interface setpoints instead of the internal
setpoints. No password is required to write this value. All other setpoint sources are configured accordingly. Control orders can be sent via Ethernet (Modbus/TCP) or RS-485 Modbus RTU.

Sending Setpoints Over Interface


Some setpoints can be sent over the communication interface.
ID
7642

Parameter
Active power
setpoint for
import/
export
control

CL

Setting range

Default

1 kW to
999999,9 kW

Description
Setpoint for the active power control. The setpoint is a long integer
32 to provide a wide range from 1 kW to 999999,9 kW. Negative
values are not allowed.
Example:
1000 kW = 1000 = 3E8Hex
Note: This setpoint will be only accepted when the parameter
Load control setpoint source (parameter 7634) ist configured to
Interface.

7640

Setpoint
power factor
import/
export

-710 to 1000 to
710

The power factor is set as a value (integer 16) between -710 to


1000 to 710. A negative value is capacitive, a positive value is inductive, 1000 = cos 1. Other values are not accepted by the unit.
Example:
cos = c0.71 cap.
cos = 1.00 1000
cos = i 0.71 ind.

-710 FD3AHex
03E8Hex
710 02C6Hex

Note: This setpoint will be only accepted when the parameter


VAR control setpoint source (parameter 7635) ist configured to
Interface.
Table 9-6: Modbus sending setpoint sover interface

Sending Binary Digital Orders Over Interface


Some single functions can be passed over from discrete inputs to the communication interface.
Function
Check
Permissive
Run
CB Aux
Voltage Raise
Voltage Lower
Base Load
Utility Unload
Ramp Pause
Setpoint Raise
Setpoint Lower
Process Control
Segment Connection 12 Act.
Segment Connection 23 Act.
Segment Connection 34 Act.
Segment Connection 45 Act.
Segment Connection 56 Act.
Segment Connection 67 Act.
Segment Connection 78 Act.
Segment Connection 81 Act.
Imp./Exp. Control

Woodward

Terminal
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149

Controllable by
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input or communication interface
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete input or communication interface

Page 163/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


Table 9-7: Modbus sending binary digital orders over interface

Figure 9-3: Modbus - sending binary digital orders over interface

ID
7645

Parameter
Release
discrete inputs over
communication interface

CL

Setting range

Default

Description
These single bits control if a function shall be switched by discrete
input or communication interface.
Bit 01 = 1 Check
Bit 02 = 1 Permissive
Bit 03 = 1 Run
Bit 04 = 1 N/A
Bit 05 = 1 Voltage Raise
Bit 06 = 1 Voltage Lower
Bit 07 = 1 Base Load
Bit 08 = 1 Utility Unload
Bit 09 = 1 Ramp Pause
Bit 10 = 1 Setpoint Raise
Bit 11 = 1 Setpoint Lower
Bit 12 = 1 Process
Bit 13 = 1 Imp./Exp. Control
Bit 14 = 1 N/A
Bit 15 = 1 N/A
Bit 16 = 1 N/A
Note:
Bit {x} = 0 -> DI interface = hardware controlled
Bit {x} = 1 -> DI interface = interface controlled

Page 164/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A
ID
7644

Parameter
Discrete inputs over
communication interface

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


CL

Setting range

Default

Description
These single bits switch the single functions if they are released
by parameter 7645.
Bit 01 = 1 Check
Bit 02 = 1 Permissive
Bit 03 = 1 Run
Bit 04 = 1 N/A
Bit 05 = 1 Voltage Raise
Bit 06 = 1 Voltage Lower
Bit 07 = 1 Base Load
Bit 08 = 1 Utility Unload
Bit 09 = 1 Ramp Pause
Bit 10 = 1 Setpoint Raise
Bit 11 = 1 Setpoint Lower
Bit 12 = 1 Process
Bit 13 = 1 Imp./Exp. Control
Bit 14 = 1 N/A
Bit 15 = 1 N/A
Bit 16 = 1 N/A
Note:
Bit {x} = 0 -> DI interface = switched Off
Bit {x} = 1 -> DI interface = switched On
Table 9-8: Modbus sending binary digital orders over interface

Loss Of Connection
The device sends Modbus binary digital orders via interface. The function Release discrete inputs over communication interface (parameter 7645) takes care if the DI interfaces are Hardware or Interface controlled. The
parameter Discrete inputs over communication interface (parameter 7644) switches the DI interfaces to On or
Off. In case of a connection loss (RS-485, RS-232 or Network B) the device can be controlled via Hardware
control and overrides the original setting of parameter 7645. The following paragraph describes the function in
detail.

Interface Control Fails


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Interface connection loss (RS-485, RS-232 or Network B).


The conditions of the discrete inputs (DI) will remain in their current settings, even in the case of interface connection loss.
Please configure the discrete inputs via hardware switches to the desired settings.
To regain system control, please energize DI 22 Modbus Reset via hardware switch (overrides the
original settings of parameter 7645; the control bits will reset to value 0).
Now all discrete inputs are Hardware controlled.

Switch Back To Interface Control


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The discrete inputs (DI) are currently Hardware controlled.


The interface connection is working again.
Please de-energize DI 22 Modbus Reset via hardware switch to be able to configure parameter 7645 to
Interface control.
The settings of parameter 7644 remain in their last configuration if there was no interrupt of the power
supply. We highly recommend to doublecheck the settings. Please check the conditions of the DIs in
Menu 9 (Notification: DI = Hardware controlled; Notification: Com = Interface controlled).
Now you must configure the discrete inputs in parameter 7645 to Interface control.
Now the discrete inputs are again Interface controlled.

NOTE
The DIs CB Aux and Modbus Reset are in general hardware controlled and cannot be changed via
interface.

Woodward

Page 165/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Figure 9-4: Modbus loss of connection

Example 1: Active Power Interface Setpoint Baseload


The setpoint for active power control is a long integer to provide a wide range from 1 to 999999.9 kW. Negative
values are not allowed. This setpoint will be accepted, if the power setpoint manager of the unit passes the setpoint through.
The active power setpoint value must be written to parameter 7642.
Example:
A power value of 500 kW = 500 (dec) = 01F4 (hex) is to be transmitted.
Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 407642.
Modbus length = 2 (INTEGER 32).
The high word is to be written to the lower address and the low word is to be written to the higher address.
The following ModScan32 screenshots show how to set the parameter address 7642 in ModScan32.

Open the preset multiple registers window by selecting Setup > Extended > Preset Regs from the menu.
Page 166/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Select OK and enter the desired values.

Select Update to take over the entered values.

Figure 9-5: Modbus - configuration example 1 - active power

Woodward

Page 167/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Example 2: Power Factor Interface Setpoint


The setpoint for the power factor control is set as a value between -710 to -999, 1000, 999 to 710. A negative
value is capacitive, a positive value is inductive, 1000 = cosphi 1. Other values are not accepted by the unit. This
setpoint will be accepted, if the power factor setpoint is selected via ToolKit.
The power factor setpoint value must be written to parameter 7640.
Example:
A power factor of 1 = 1000 (dec) = 03E8 (hex) is to be transmitted.
Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 40509.
Modbus length = 1 (UNSIGNED 16).
The following Modscan32 screenshot shows the settings made to parameter address 7640 in ModScan32.

Figure 9-6: Modbus - configuration example 2 power factor

Page 168/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Changing Parameter Settings Via Modus

Parameter Setting
NOTE
The example tables below are excerpts of the parameter list in Chapter: Configuration & Operation.

NOTE
Be sure to enter the password for code level 2 or higher for the corresponding interface to get access
for changing parameter settings.

NOTE
The new entered value must comply with the parameter setting range when changing the parameter
setting.

Example 1: Addressing the password for serial interface1:


Par. ID.
10401

Parameter
Password for serial interface1

Setting range
0000 to 9999

Data type
UNSIGNED 16

Table 9-9: Modbus password for serial interface 1

Modbus address = 400000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 410402


Modbus length = 1 (UNSIGNED 16)
The following Modscan32 screenshots show the configurations made to address parameter 10401.

Figure 9-7: Modbus - configuration example 1


Woodward

Page 169/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Example 2: Addressing the generator rated voltage:


Par. ID.
1766

Parameter
Generator rated voltage

Setting range
50 to 650000 V

Data type
UNSIGNED 32

Table 9-10: Modbus generator rated voltage

Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 41767


Modbus length = 2 (UNSIGNED 32)
The following Modscan32 screenshot shows the configurations made to address parameter 1766.

Figure 9-8: Modbus - configuration example 2

Example 3: Addressing the generator voltage measuring:


Par. ID.
1851

Parameter
Generator voltage measuring

Setting range
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
n/a
n/a
3Ph 4WOD

Data type
UNSIGNED 16

Table 9-11: Modbus generator voltage measuring

Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 41852


Modbus length = 1 (UNSIGNED 16)

NOTE
If the setting range contains a list of parameter settings like in this example, the parameter settings are
numbered and start with 0 for the first parameter setting. The number corresponding with the respective parameter setting must be configured.

The following Modscan32 screenshot shows the configurations made to address parameter 1851, which is configured to "3Ph 4W".

Figure 9-9: Modbus - configuration example 3

Page 170/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Remotely Resetting The Default Values


Modbus Via RS-232 / RS-485 Or Modbus TCP/IP
It is possible to remotely reset the unit to its default values through Modbus (via RS-232 / RS-485) or Modbus
TCP/IP using the parameter 10417 and 1701. The required procedure is detailed in the following steps.
Par. ID.
10417
1701

Parameter
Factory default settings
Reset factory default values

Setting range
Yes / No
Yes / No

Data type
UNSIGNED 16
UNSIGNED 16

Table 9-12: Modbus reset default values

In order to enable the resetting procedure, parameter 10417 must be enabled.


Example:
The resetting procedure has to be enabled.
Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 410418
Modbus length = 1 (UNSIGNED 16)
The following Modscan32 screenshot shows the settings made to parameter 10417 in ModScan32. It is possible
to set the format to decimal to view the value using the "display options".

Figure 9-10: Modbus - remote control parameter 1701

By double-clicking the address, a Write Register command is issued. The following screenshot shows how the
parameter is enabled using the ModScan32 Software. The value must be set to "1" to enable the parameter.

Figure 9-11: Modbus - write register - enable the resetting procedure via RS-232 or Modbus TCP/IP

Woodward

Page 171/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

In order to reset the default values, parameter parameter 1701 must be enabled.
Example:
The default values are to be reset.
Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 41702
Modbus length = 1 (UNSIGNED 16)
The following Modscan32 screenshot shows the settings made to parameter 1701 in ModScan32. It is possible to
set the format to decimal to view the value using the "display options".

Figure 9-12: Modbus - remote control parameter 1701

By double-clicking the address, a Write Register command may be issued. The following screenshot shows how
the parameter is enabled using the ModScan32 Software. The value must be set to "1" to enable the parameter.

Figure 9-13: Modbus - write register - resetting the default values

Page 172/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Modbus Parameters

NOTE
The following parameters are available for configuring the Modbus modules on the Serial Interfaces.
Refer to Chapter: Configuration & Operation for detailed information about all parameters.

Serial Interface 1
Parameter table

ID
Text
Configure RS-232 interfaces: serial interface 1
3185
ModBus Slave ID
3186
Reply delay time

Setting range

Default value

0 to 255
0.00 to 1.00 s

1
0.00 s

Table 9-13: Modbus - serial interface 1 - parameters

Serial Interface 2
Parameter table

ID
Text
Configure RS-485 interfaces: serial interface 2
3188
ModBus Slave ID
3189
Reply delay time

Setting range

Default value

0 to 255
0.00 to 2.55 s

1
0.00 s

Table 9-14: Modbus - serial interface 2 parameters

Network B Modbus
Parameter table

ID
Text
Configure TCP/IP Modbus interfaces: Network B
5430
TCP/IP address0
5431
TCP/IP address1
5432
TCP/IP address2
5433
TCP/IP address3 (Device
number of MSLC-2 = 33 to
48)

Setting range

Default value

0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255

192
168
1
33

Table 9-15: Modbus - TCP/IP Network B parameters

Woodward

Page 173/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Appendix A.
Technical Data

Nameplate
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

P/N
REV
S/N
S/N
S/N
Type
Type
Details
Approval

Item number
Item revision number
Serial number (numerical)
Serial number (barcode)
Date of production (year-month)
Description (short)
Description (long)
Technical data
Approvals

Measuring values (voltages) delta-wye voltage


Measuring voltages

Rated value (Vrated)

Maximum value (Vmax)

Rated voltage phase ground

Rated surge voltage


Linear measuring range
Measuring frequency
Accuracy
Input Resistance per path
Maximum power consumption per path

120 V
69/120 Vac
Max. 86/150 Vac
150 Vac
2.5 kV
1.25 Vrated
50/60 Hz (40.0 to 85.0 Hz)
Class 0.5
120V 0.498 M
< 0.15 W

480 V
277/480 Vac
Max. 346/600 Vac
300 Vac
4.0 kV

[1] Rated value (Irated) ../1 A


Class 0.5
1.5 Irated
< 0.15 VA
[1] 50.0 Irated

[5] Rated value (Irated) ../5 A

480 V 2.0 M

Measuring values (currents) isolated


Measuring current
Accuracy
Linear measuring range
Maximum power consumption per path
Rated short-time current (1 s)

[5] 10.0 Irated

Ambient variables
Power supply
Intrinsic consumption
Insulation voltage (continuously)
Insulation test voltage (1 s)
Overvoltage ( 2 min)
Reverse voltage protection
Grounding supply voltage source
Degree of pollution
Maximum elevation

12/24 Vdc (8 to 40 Vdc)


Max. 15W
40 Vac
100 Vac
80 Vdc
Full supply range
Isolated, negative potential or positive potential grounded
2
2000 m ASL

Discrete inputs isolated


Input range (Vcont. dig. input)
Input resistance

Page 174/198

Rated voltage 12/24 Vdc (8 to 40.0 Vdc)


Approx. 20 k

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Discrete outputs potential free


Contact material
General purpose (GP) (Vcont, relays)

AgCdO
AC
2.00 Aac@250 Vac

Pilot duty (PD) (Vcont, relays)

AC
B300

DC
2.00 Adc@24 Vdc
0.36 Adc@125 Vdc
0.18 Adc@250 Vdc
DC
1.00 Adc@24 Vdc
0.22 Adc@125 Vdc
0.10 Adc@250 Vdc

Analog inputs (none isolated) freely scaleable


Maximum permissible voltage againt PE
(Ground)
Resolution
0 to 20 mA input
0 to 10 V input
Accuracy

15 V
11 Bit
Internal load 124
Input resistance approx. 80 k
1.0 %

Interface
RS-232 interface

Insulation voltage (continuously)

Insulation test voltage (1 s)

Version
RS-485 interface

Insulation voltage (continuously)

Insulation test voltage (1 s)

Version
Ethernet interface

Insulation test voltage (1 s)

Version

Isolated
100 Vac
500 Vac
RS-232 Standard
Isolated
100 Vac
500 Vac
RS-485 Standard
Isolated
500 Vac
100 Mbit/s

Battery
Type
Life span (operation without power supply)
Battery field replacement

Lithium
Approx. 5 years
Not allowed

Housing
Type
Dimensions (W H D)
Wiring
Recommended locked torque
Weight

Sheet metal Custom


Sheet metal 250 227 84 mm (9.84 9.00 3.30 in)
Screw-plug-terminals 2.5 mm
4 inch pounds / 0.5 Nm
Use 60/75 C copper wire only
Use class 1 wire only or equivalent
approx. 1,900 g (4.2 lbs)

Protection
Protection system
EMC test (CE)

IP 20
Tested according to applicable EN guidelines

Certifications
Listings
Marine

CE marking; cUL/UL ordinary Locations, File No. 231544; GOST-R; CSA


Type approval: Lloyds Register (LR)
Design Assessment: American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

Generic note
Accuracy

Woodward

Is referred to full scale value

Page 175/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Environmental Data

Vibration
Frequency Range Sine Sweep

Acceleration
Frequency Range Random

Power Intensity

RMS Value

Standards

5 Hz to 100 Hz
4G
10 Hz to 500 Hz
0.015G / Hz
1.04 Grms
EN 60255-21-1 (EN 60068-2-6, Fc)
EN 60255-21-3
Lloyds Register, Vibration Test2
SAEJ1455 Chassis Data
MIL-STD 810F, M514.5A, Cat.4,
Truck/Trailer tracked-restrained
Cargo, Fig. 514.5-C1

Shock
Shock
Standards

40G, Saw tooth pulse, 11 ms


EN 60255-21-2
MIL-STD 810F, M516.5, Procedure 1

Temperature
Cold, Dry Heat (storage)
Cold, Dry Heat (operating)
Standards

-40 C (-40 F) / 85 C (185 F)


-40 C (-40 F) / 70 C (158 F)
IEC 60068-2-2, Test Bb and Bd
IEC 60068-2-1, Test Ab and Ad

Humidity
Humidity
Standards

60 C, 95 % RH, 5 days
IEC 60068-2-30, Test DB

Marine Environmental Categories


Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS)

Page 176/198

ENV1, ENV2, ENV3 and ENV4

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Accuracy

Measuring value

Display

Accuracy

Measuring start

Notes

15.0 to 85.0 Hz
40.0 to 85.0 Hz

0.2 % (of 85 Hz)

5 % (of PT secondary voltage setting) 1

0 to 650 kV

0.5 %
(of 150/600 V) 2

1.5 % (of PT
second-ary voltage
setting) 1
2 % (of PT secondary voltage setting) 1

0 to 32,000 A

0.5 %
(of 1.3/6.5 A) 3

1 % (of 1/5 A) 3

-2 to 2 GW

1 % (of 150/600 V *
1.3/6.5 A) 2/3

Starts with detecting


the zero passage of
current/voltage

-2 to 2 Gvar

1 % (of 150/600 V *
1.3/6.5 A) 2/3

Starts with detecting


the zero passage of
current/voltage

Lagging 0.00 to
1.00 to leading 0.00

2%

2 % (of 1/5 A) 3

1.00 is displayed
for measuring values below the
measuring start

8 to 40 V

1 % (of 24 V)
1.25 % (of PT secondary volt. setting)

180 is displayed
for measuring values below measuring start

Frequency
Generator
Busbar

Voltage
Wye generator / mains / busbar
Delta generator / mains /
busbar

Current
Generator
Mains / ground current
Max. value

Real power
Actual total real power value

Reactive power
Actual value in L1, L2, L3

Power factor
Actual value power factor L1

Miscellaneous
Battery voltage
Phase angle

-180 to 180

Miscellaneous
0 to 20 mA / 0 to 10 V
1
2
3

Freely scaleable

1.2 % (of 20 mA) /


1.2 % (of 10 V)

Setting of the parameter for the PT secondary rated voltage


Depending on the used measuring inputs (100/400 V)
Depending on the CT input hardware (1/5 A) of the respective unit

Reference conditions (for measuring the accuracy):

Input voltage ............................. sinusoidal rated voltage


Input current ............................. sinusoidal rated current
Frequency ................................. rated frequency +/- 2 %
Power supply ............................ rated voltage +/- 2 %
Power factor (cos ) ................. 1.00
Ambient temperature ................ 23 C +/- 2 K
Warm-up period........................ 20 minutes

Woodward

Page 177/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Appendix B.
Useful Information
Connecting 24 V Relays

Interferences in the interaction of all components may affect the function of electronic devices.
One interference factor is disabling inductive loads, like coils of electromagnetic switching devices. When disabling such a device, high switch-off induces voltages may occur, which might destroy adjacent electronic devices
or result interference voltage pulses, which lead to functional faults, by capacitive coupling mechanisms.
Since an interference-free switch-off is not possible without additional equipment, the relay coil is connected
with an interference suppressing circuit.
If 24 V (coupling) relays are used in an application, it is required to connect a protection circuit to avoid interferences. Figure 9-14 shows the exemplary connection of a diode as an interference suppressing circuit.

Relay
output

Control unit
Power
supply
Figure 9-14: Interference suppressing circuit - connection

Advantages and disadvantages of different interference suppressing circuits are described in the following.
Connection diagram

Load current / voltage


curve

I0

0
v

t0

Advantages

Disadvantages

Uncritical dimensioning
Lowest possible induced voltage
Very simple and reliable

High release delay

No attenuation below VVDR

V0
t2

t1

I0

VDR

t1

t2
t

I0

0
v

t0
V0

Uncritical dimensioning
High energy absorption
Very simple setup
Suitable for AC voltage
Reverse polarity protected

t0

V0

C
0

T1

HF attenuation by energy storage


Immediate shut-off limiting
Attenuation below limiting voltage
Very suitable for AC voltage
Reverse polarity protected

Exact dimensioning required

Table 9-16: Interference suppressing circuit for relays


Page 178/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Appendix C.
Data Protocols

Data Protocol 5200

Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

Size

Format

Parameter
ID

Description MSLC-2

50000
50001

450001
450002

16 bits
16 bits

signed
signed

3181

50002

450003

16 bits

signed

3182

50003

450004

16 bits

signed

3183

50004

450005

16 bits

signed

7732

50005

450006

16 bits

Scaling Volts (16 bits) Exponent 10x V (2;1;0;-1)


Scaling Amps (16 bits) Exponent 10x A (0;-1)
Scaling Process engineering unit
0 (reserve)

50006

450007

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50007
50008

450008
450009

16 bits
16 bits

0 (reserve)
0 (reserve)

50009

450010

16 bits

0 (reserve)

Protocol-ID, always 5200


Scaling Power (16 bits)
Exponent 10x W (5;4;3;2)

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)

Units
--

AC Measurement values
50010

450011

16 bits

signed

144

Generator frequency

0.01

Hz

50011

450012

16 bits

signed

246

Generator total power

scaled defined by index 3181


(modicon Adress 450002)

kW

50012

450013

16 bits

signed

247

Generator total reactive


power

scaled defined by index 3181


(modicon Adress 450002)

kvar

50013

450014

16 bits

signed

160

Generator power factor

0.001

50014

450015

16 bits

signed

248

Generator voltage L1-L2

50015

450016

16 bits

signed

249

Generator voltage L2-L3

50016

450017

16 bits

signed

250

Generator voltage L3-L1

50017

450018

16 bits

signed

251

Generator voltage L1-N

50018

450019

16 bits

signed

252

Generator voltage L2-N

50019

450020

16 bits

signed

253

Generator voltage L3-N

50020

450021

16 bits

signed

255

Generator current 1

50021

450022

16 bits

signed

256

Generator current 2

50022

450023

16 bits

signed

257

Generator current 3

50023

450024

16 bits

signed

209

Busbar frequency

scaled defined by index 3182


(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3183
(modicon Adress 450004)
scaled defined by index 3183
(modicon Adress 450004)
scaled defined by index 3183
(modicon Adress 450004)
0.01

50024

450025

16 bits

signed

254

50025
50026

450026
450027

16 bits
16 bits

signed
signed

147
118

50027

450028

16 bits

signed

119

Busbar voltage L1-L2 (or


L1-N)
Auxiliary busbar frequency
Auxiliary busbar voltage
L1-L2
Auxiliary busbar L2-L3

50028

450029

16 bits

signed

120

Auxiliary busbar L3-L1

Woodward

scaled defined by index 3182


(modicon Adress 450003)
0.01
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)

V
V
V
V
V
V
A
A
A
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
V

Page 179/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

Size

Format

Parameter
ID

50029

450030

16 bits

signed

121

Auxiliary busbar L1-N

50030

450031

16 bits

signed

122

Auxiliary busbar L2-N

50031

450032

16 bits

signed

123

Auxiliary busbar L3-N

50032

450033

16 bits

signed

4639

50033

450034

16 bits

signed

4627

50034

450035

16 bits

signed

4628

50035

450036

16 bits

signed

4629

50036

450037

16 bits

signed

4630

50037

450038

16 bits

signed

4631

50038

450039

16 bits

Phase Angle Generator /


Busbar
Active Setpoint generator
frequency
Active Setpoint generator
voltage
Active Setpoint generator
load level
Active Setpoint generator
reactive power
Active Setpoint generator
power factor
0 (reserve)

50039

450040

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50040

450041

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50041

450042

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50042

450043

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50043

450044

16 bits

0 (reserve)

DC Analogue Values (Engine Values)


50044
450045
16 bits

Description MSLC-2

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
scaled defined by index 3182
(modicon Adress 450003)
0.1

Units

0.01

Hz

0.01

0.01

0.01

V
V
V

(-7101000...710)

signed

10110

Battery voltage

50045

450046

16 bits

signed

10117

50046

450047

16 bits

signed

10151

Remote Load / Process


Reference Input (AI4)
Process Signal Input (AI5)

0.1

000.0100.0

50047

450048

16 bits

signed

7718

Power Factor (AI6)

000.0100.0

50048

450049

16 bits

signed

5535

Speed Biasing (AO1)

0.01

50049

450050

16 bits

signed

5635

AVR Biasing (AO2)

0.01

50050

450051

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50051

450052

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50052

450053

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50053

450054

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50054

450055

16 bits

0 (reserve)

(-7101000...710)

Control and Status


50055

450056

16 bits

50056

450057

16 bits

signed

4636

Sync Control State

0: Off
1: Check mode active
2: Permissive mode active
3: Run mode active
4: Close Timer runs
5: Sync Timer runs
6: Breaker synchronized
7: Auto-Off position

50057

450058

16 bits

signed

4634

Load Control Mode

0: Inactive
1: Droop
2: At Unload trip
3: Load sharing
4: Base load control
5: Import/Export control (MSLC
only)
6: Process control
7: Remote process control (reserved)
8: Peak load control (reserved)
9: Zero power control (reserved)
10: Load share (reserved)
11: Process slave (reserved)

Page 180/198

0 (reserve)

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

Size

Format

Parameter
ID

Description MSLC-2

50058

450059

16 bits

signed

4635

Reactive Load Control Mode

50059

450060

16 bits

bit array

4151

Condition Flags 1

50060

50061

450061

450062

Woodward

16 bits

16 bits

bit array

bit array

4156

4155

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)
0: Inactive
1: Off
2: Droop
3: VAR sharing
4: Reactive load control
5: Import/Export reactive load
(MSLC only)
6: Const.Gen Power Factor
(MSLC only)
7: Remote process control (reserved)
8: - (reserved)
9: Zero power control (reserved)
10: Reactive load share (reserved)
11: Process slave (reserved)

Units

Generator is Dead

Mask: 8000h

Bit

0 (reserve)
Generator is OK

Mask: 4000h
Mask: 2000h

Bit
Bit

Generator breaker is
closed

Mask: 1000h

Bit

Mask: 0800h

Bit

Busbar is ok (in same


segment)

Mask: 0400h

Bit

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Mask: 0100h

Bit

Mask: 0080h

Bit

Aux. Busbar anti clock


wise system is recognized
Aux. Busbar clock wise
system is recognized
Busbar is dead (in same
segment)

Mask: 0040h

Bit

Mask: 0020h

Bit

Mask: 0010h

Bit

Mask: 0008h

Bit

Generator counter clock


wise system is recognized
Generator clock wise system is recognized

Mask: 0004h

Bit

Mask: 0002h

Bit

Mask: 0001h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 8000h

Bit

0 (reserve)
0 (reserve)

Mask: 4000h
Mask: 2000h

Bit
Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 1000h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0800h

Bit

Dead busbar closure request active


Active power load share is
active
Reactive power load share
is active
0 (reserve)

Mask: 0400h

Bit

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Mask: 0100h

Bit

Mask: 0080h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0040h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0020h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0010h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0008h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0004h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0002h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0001h

Bit

Condition Flags 2

Condition Flags 3

Page 181/198

Manual 37444A
Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


Size

Format

Parameter
ID

Description MSLC-2

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)
Mask: 8000h

Units

0 (reserve)
3-Position Controller
Volt./ReactPow raise
3-Position Controller
Volt./ReactPow lower
GCB is closed

Mask: 4000h
Mask: 2000h

Bit
Bit

Mask: 1000h

Bit

Mask: 0800h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0400h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Synchronisation GCB is
active
Opening GCB is active

Mask: 0100h

Bit

Mask: 0080h

Bit

Closing GCB is active

Mask: 0040h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0020h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0010h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0008h

Bit

Unloading generator is active


0 (reserve)

Mask: 0004h

Bit

Mask: 0002h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0001h

Bit

0 (reserve)

50062

450063

16 bits

signed

4637

50063

450064

16 bits

signed

4638

50064

450065

16 bits

signed

7706

50065

450066

16 bits

signed

50066

450067

16 bits

signed

50067

450068

16 bits

bit array

Bit

4503

Automatic Segment
Allocation (ASA)
Collective Breaker State
(CBS)
Number of the MSLC master unit
0 (reserve)

000.00100.0

4600

Process Signal Input

000.00100.0

4157

Interface Control Switch


0 (reserve)

Mask: 8000h

Bit

0 (reserve)
0 (reserve)

Mask: 4000h
Mask: 2000h

Bit
Bit

Source: Droop Tracking


switch
Source: Process switch

Mask: 1000h

Bit

Mask: 0800h

Bit

Source: Lower load switch

Mask: 0400h

Bit

Source: Raise load switch

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Source: Ramp pause


switch
Source: Load/ Unload
switch
Source: Base load switch

Mask: 0100h

Bit

Mask: 0080h

Bit

Mask: 0040h

Bit

Source: Lower voltage


switch
Source: Raise voltage
switch
Source: CB Aux contact
switch
Source: Synchronization
GCB run switch
Source: Synchronization
GCB permissive switch
Source: Synchronization
GCB check switch
Process
reference
Power factor
reference
0 (reserve)

Mask: 0020h

Bit

Mask: 0010h

Bit

Mask: 0008h

Bit

Mask: 0004h

Bit

Mask: 0002h

Bit

Mask: 0001h

Bit

000.00100.0

50068

450069

16 bits

signed

4605

50069

450070

16 bits

signed

7708

50070

450071

16 bits
bit array

4626

1...8
0255
1..16

(-0.7101.000...0.710)

Relay Outputs
50071

450072

Page 182/198

16 bits

Relay Outputs 1
Woodward

Manual 37444A
Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


Size

Format

Parameter
ID

Description MSLC-2

Units

0 (reserve)

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)
Mask: 8000h

0 (reserve)

Mask: 4000h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 2000h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 1000h

Bit

Voltage Lower Relay (R12)

Mask: 0800h

Bit

Voltage Raise Relay (R11)

Mask: 0400h

Bit

Alarm 3 (R10)

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Alarm 2 (R9)

Mask: 0100h

Bit

Alarm 1 (R8)

Mask: 0080h

Bit

Centralized Alarm (R7)

Mask: 0040h

Bit

Breaker Close Relay (R6)

Mask: 0020h

Bit

Breaker Open Relay (R5)

Mask: 0010h

Bit

Low Limit Relay (R4)

Mask: 0008h

Bit

High Limit Relay (R3)

Mask: 0004h

Bit

Load Switch Relay (R2)

Mask: 0002h

Bit

Alarm Relay (R1)

Mask: 0001h

Bit

Alarm 16 Reserve

Mask: 8000h

Bit

Alarm 15 Reserve

Mask: 4000h

Bit

GCB Open Failure

Mask: 2000h

Bit

Centralized Alarms

Mask: 1000h

Bit

Missing member

Mask: 0800h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0400h

Bit

Communication Error

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Voltage Range Limit

Mask: 0100h

Bit

High Voltage Limit

Mask: 0080h

Bit

Low Voltage Limit

Mask: 0040h

Bit

Low Process Limit

Mask: 0020h

Bit

High Process Limit

Mask: 0010h

Bit

Low Load Limit

Mask: 0008h

Bit

High Load Limit

Mask: 0004h

Bit

GCB Close Failure

Mask: 0002h

Bit

Synchronizer Timeout

Mask: 0001h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 8000h

Bit

0 (reserve)
0 (reserve)

Mask: 4000h
Mask: 2000h

Bit
Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 1000h

Bit

Process Control Switch


(DI12)
Load Lower Switch (DI11)

Mask: 0800h

Bit

Mask: 0400h

Bit

Load Raise Switch (DI10)

Mask: 0200h

Bit

Ramp Pause Switch (DI9)

Mask: 0100h

Bit

50072

450073

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50073

450074

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50074

450075

16 bits

0 (reserve)

Bit

Alarm Management
50075

450076

16 bits

bit array

4623

Alarms 1

50076

450077

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50077

450078

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50078

450079

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50079

450080

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50080

450081

16 bits

0 (reserve)

Discrete Inputs
50081

450082

Woodward

16 bits

bit array

4624

Digital Inputs 1

Page 183/198

Manual 37444A
Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


Size

Format

Parameter
ID

Description MSLC-2
Load/Unload Switch (DI8)
(Energized=Load)
Base Load Control Switch
(DI7)
Voltage Lower Switch (DI6)

50082

450083

16 bits

bit array

4625

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)
Mask: 0080h

Units

Mask: 0040h

Bit

Bit

Mask: 0020h

Bit

Voltage Raise Switch (DI5)

Mask: 0010h

Bit

Circuit Breaker Aux. is


closed (DI4)
Synchronization Run
switch is active (DI3)
Synchronization Permissive switch is active (DI2)
Synchronization Check
switch is active (DI1)
Digital Inputs 2

Mask: 0008h

Bit

Mask: 0004h

Bit

Mask: 0002h

Bit

Mask: 0001h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 8000h

Bit

0 (reserve)
0 (reserve)

Mask: 4000h
Mask: 2000h

Bit
Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 1000h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0800h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0400h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0200h

Bit

0 (reserve)

Mask: 0100h

Bit

Mask: 0080h

Bit

Mask: 0040h

Bit

Mask: 0020h

Bit

Mask: 0010h

Bit

Mask: 0008h

Bit

Mask: 0004h

Bit

Mask: 0002h

Bit

Mask: 0001h

Bit

50083

450084

16 bits

Segment connection 81 is
closed (DI20)
Segment connection 78 is
closed (DI19)
Segment connection 67 is
closed (DI18)
Segment connection 56 is
closed (DI17)
Segment connection 45 is
closed (DI16)
Segment connection 34 is
closed (DI15)
Segment connection 23 is
closed (DI14)
Segment connection 12 is
closed (DI13)
0 (reserve)

50084

450085

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50085

450086

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50086

450087

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50087

450088

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50088

450089

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50089

450090

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50090

450091

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50091

450092

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50092

450093

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50093

450094

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50094

450095

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50095

450096

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50096

450097

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50097

450098

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50098

450099

16 bits

0 (reserve)

50099

450100

16 bits

0 (reserve)

Int32 (Long)
AC Measurement values
50100

450101

Page 184/198

32 bits

signed

135

Total generatorpower

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Modbus
Adress

Modicon
Adress

Size

Format

Parameter
ID

Description MSLC-2

Multiplier
(BUS-data * Multiplier = real
value)
1

Units

50102

450103

32 bits

signed

136

50104

450105

32 bits

signed

137

50106

450107

32 bits

signed

170

50108

450109

32 bits

signed

171

50110

450111

32 bits

signed

216

50112

450113

32 bits

signed

185

Total generator reactive


power
Total generator apparent
power
Average generator WyeVoltage
Average generator DeltaVoltage
Average Busbar 1 DeltaVoltage
Average generator Current

VA

0.1

0.1

0.1

50114

450115

32 bits

signed

111

Generator current 1

0.001

0.001

50116

450117

32 bits

signed

112

Generator current 2

0.001

50118

450119

32 bits

signed

113

Generator current 3

0.001

50120

450121

32 bits

signed

108

Generator voltage L1-L2

0.1

50122

450123

32 bits

signed

109

Generator voltage L2-L3

0.1

50124
50126

450125

32 bits

signed

110

Generator voltage L3-L1

0.1

450127

32 bits

signed

114

Generator voltage L1-N

0.1

50128

450129

32 bits

signed

115

Generator voltage L2-N

0.1

50130

450131

32 bits

signed

116

Generator voltage L3-N

0.1

50132

450133

32 bits

signed

125

50134

450135

32 bits

signed

126

50136

450137

32 bits

signed

127

50138

450139

32 bits

signed

182

0.1

50140

450141

32 bits

signed

173

0.1

50142

450143

32 bits

signed

174

0.1

50144

450145

32 bits

signed

118

Generator active power 1N


Generator active power 2N
Generator active power 3N
Busbar voltage (L1-N) L1L2
Average Aux.busbar WyeVoltage
Average Aux.busbar DeltaVoltage
Aux.busbar voltage L1-L2

0.1

50146

450147

32 bits

signed

119

Aux.busbar voltage L2-L3

0.1

50148

450149

32 bits

signed

120

Aux.busbar voltage L3-L1

0.1

50150

450151

32 bits

signed

121

Aux.busbar voltage L1-N

0.1

50152

450153

32 bits

signed

122

Aux.busbar voltage L2-N

0.1

50154

450155

32 bits

signed

123

Aux.busbar voltage L3-N

0.1

50156
50158
50160
50162

450157
450159
450161
450163

32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits

signed
signed
signed
signed

7719
7720
7721
7722

0 (reserve)
0 (reserve)
Load reference
Reactive load reference

0.001
0.001
0.1
0.1

kW
kvar
kW
kvar

50164

450165

32 bits

signed

7726

Process reference input

0.1

50166
50168

450167
450169

32 bits
32 bits

signed
signed

7727
7737

Process signal input


Process reference toolkit

0.1
0.1

50170

450171

32 bits

signed

7738

Remote load reference input

0.1

Woodward

var

kW

Page 185/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Appendix D.
Parameter Overview

Introduction

Parameter List Columns


The parameter list consists of the following columns, which provide important information for each parameter:

NamespaceX
The namespaces 1 and 2 are used to combine all parameters within functional groups.

ID
The parameter ID is a unique identifier for each individual parameter. It is mentioned besides each parameter in
ToolKit and also required when configuring the unit via interface.

Parameter Text
The parameter text describes the parameter and appears on the configuration screens of the unit and ToolKit.

Setting Range
The setting range describes the range for possible parameter settings and may either be a range (e.g. 0 to 9), or a
selection of different options (e.g. Yes or No). If the respective parameter allows configuring different options,
the number behind each option is the number, which needs to be transmitted via interface to select this option.

Default Value
The default value is the parameter setting at delivery of the unit or after resetting the unit to factory settings. If the
parameter allows configuring different options, the default value describes the number of the respective option.

Data Type
The data type indicates the data type of the respective parameter. The following data types are possible:
UNSIGNED8
unsigned 8 bit integer
UNSIGNED16
unsigned 16 bit integer
UNSIGNED32
unsigned 32 bit integer
SIGNED32
signed 32 bit integer
INTEGER16
16 bit integer

Code Level (CL)


This is the minimum code level, which is required to access the respective parameter.

Page 186/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Parameter List

Namespace1

Namespace2

MENU 0

MENU 0

Parameter Text

Setting Range

7584

Synchronizer timeout alarm

7585

Reclose limit alarm

MENU 0

7586

High load limit alarm

MENU 0

7587

Low load limit alarm

MENU 0

7588

High process limit alarm

MENU 0

7589

Low process limit alarm

MENU 0

7590

Low voltage limit alarm

MENU 0

7591

High voltage limit alarm

MENU 0

7592

Voltage range limit alarm

MENU 0

7593

Communication error alarm

MENU 0

7595

Missing member alarm

MENU 0

7596

Centralized alarm

MENU 0

7597

CB open fail

MENU 1

3063

Synchronizer timeout

Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
Off ; 0
Alarm1 ; 1
Alarm2 ; 2
Alarm3 ; 3
003 to 999 s

MENU 1

3417

CB close hold time

0.10 to 0.50 s

0.50 s

MENU 1

3419

01 to 10

MENU 1

3421

CB maximum closing
attempts
CB open monitoring

0.10 to 5.00 s

2.00 s

MENU 1

4534

Reclose delay

0001 to 1000 s

MENU 1

4539

MENU 1

4540

Frequency synchronizer
proportional gain
Frequency synchronizer
integral gain

Woodward

ID

Default Value

Data Type

CL

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

060 s

0002 s

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

000.01 to 100.00

000.80

INTEGER 16

000.00 to 020.00

000.50

INTEGER 16

2
2
2
2

Page 187/198

Manual 37444A
Namespace1

Namespace2

MENU 1
MENU 1

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control


ID

Parameter Text

4541

Voltage window

4712

MENU 1

5503

MENU 1

5505

Slip frequency setpoint offset


Frequency control setpoint
ramp
Phase matching gain

MENU 1

5506

Phase matching df-start

0.02 to 0.25 Hz

0.05 Hz

MENU 1

5516

00.00 to 70.00 Hz

55.00 Hz

MENU 1

5517

MENU 1

5610

MENU 1

5611

MENU 1

5701

MENU 1

5702

MENU 1

5703

MENU 1

5704

MENU 1

5705

Start frequency control level


Start frequency control delay
Voltage synchronizer proportional gain
Voltage synchronizer
integral gain
Positive frequency
differential CB
Negative frequency
differential CB
Max. positive phase
window CB
Max. negative phase window CB
Breaker delay

MENU 1

5707

MENU 1

5730

MENU 1

5820

MENU 1

7513

Dead bus detection max.


volt.
Voltage matching

MENU 1

7514

Auto re-synchronization

MENU 1

7555

Dead bus closure

MENU 1

7556

MENU 1

MENU 2

Phase matching CB dwell


time
Synchronization CB

Setting Range

Default Value

Data Type

CL

00.50 to 10.00 %

00.50 %

INTEGER 16

-00.50 to 00.50 Hz

00.10 Hz

INTEGER 16

02.50 Hz/s

00.10 to 60.00 Hz/s

000 to 999 s

001 s

000.01 to 100.00

001.00

000.01 to 100.00

000.50

00.02 to 00.49 Hz

00.18 Hz

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

-00.49 to 00.00 Hz

-00.10 Hz

INTEGER 16

000.0 to 060.0

005.0

INTEGER 16

-060.0 to 000.0

-005.0

INTEGER 16

040 to 300 ms

080 ms

00.0 to 60.0 s

00.5 s

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16

01 to 99

Slip frequency ; 0
Phase matching ; 1
000 to 030 %

0
10%

2
2
1
1
2
2
2

2
2
2

Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1

Reclose limit alarm

Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1

UNSIGNED
16

7557

Synchronizer timeout alarm

1752

System A rated load

MENU 2

3123

Utility unload trip time

MENU 2

3125

Generator unload trip

00.5 to 99.9 %

MENU 2
MENU 2

4506
4515

Utility unload trip


Raise load rate

00000 to 30000 kW
000.01 to 100.00 %/s

00005 kW
001.00 %/s

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16
INTEGER 16

Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
000000.1 to
999999.9 kW
003 to 999 s

MENU 2

4516

Lower load rate

000.01 to 100.00 %/s

001.00 %/s

INTEGER 16

MENU 2

4523

Import /export droop

000.0 to 100.0 %

MENU 2

4524

Unload ramp rate

000.01 to 100.00 %/s

MENU 2

4526

High load limit DO

MENU 2

4528

MENU 2

4529

MENU 2

MENU 2
MENU 2

1
1

000250.0 kW
060 s
03.0 %

2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2

000.0 %

INTEGER 16

003.00 %/s

INTEGER 16

-150 to 150 %

90%

INTEGER 16

Low load limit DO

002 to 100 %

5%

INTEGER 16

Gen load switch 1 PU

000 to 100 %

0%

INTEGER 16

4530

Gen load switch 1 DO

000 to 100 %

10%

INTEGER 16

4538

Gen load switch 2 PU

000 to 100 %

100%

INTEGER 16

4543

Gen load switch 2 DO

000 to 100 %

90%

INTEGER 16

MENU 2

4700

Load ramp rate

000.01 to 100.00 %/s

003.00 %/s

INTEGER 16

MENU 2

4709

High load limit PU

-150 to 150 %

100%

INTEGER 16

MENU 2

4710

Low load limit PU

000 to 100 %

0%

INTEGER 16

Page 188/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Namespace1

Namespace2

ID

Parameter Text

Setting Range

MENU 2

5510

MENU 2

5511

MENU 2

5512

MENU 2

MENU 2

Default Value

Data Type

CL

5522

Import/export control proportional gain


Import/export control
integral gain
Import/export control
derivative ratio
Load control setpoint ramp

000.01 to 100.00

001.00

000.01 to 100.00

000.50

000.01 to 100.00

000.01

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
SIGNED 32

7504

High load limit alarm

MENU 2

7505

Low load limit alarm

MENU 2

7506

Load limit switch

MENU 2

7616

Gen load high limit alarm

MENU 2

7617

Gen load low limit alarm

MENU 2

7618

Gen load limit switch

MENU 2

7634

MENU 2

7717

Load control setpoint


source
Import / export level

Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Internal ; 0
Interface ; 1
-999999.9 to 999999.9 kW

MENU 2

7755

003.00

UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4500

MENU 3

4501

000.01 to 100.00 s

003.00 s

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4502

000.01 to 100.00 s

000.01 s

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

MENU 3

MENU 3

000.10 to 100.00 %/s

003.00 %/s
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000020.0 kW

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0

Export ; 0
Import ; 1
000.01 to 100.00

4504

Interface switch Import Export


Process control
proportional gain
Process control integral
gain
Process control
derivative ratio
Raise reference rate

00.01 to 20.00 %/s

00.10 %/s

INTEGER 16

4505

Lower reference rate

00.01 to 20.00 %/s

00.10 %/s

INTEGER 16

4508

Process droop

000.0 to 100.0 %

000.0 %

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4509

Process filter

0 to 8

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4510

Process high limit PU

000.0 to 150.0 %

075.0 %

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4511

Process high limit DO

000.0 to 150.0 %

075.0 %

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4513

Process low limit PU

000.0 to 150.0 %

050.0 %

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

4514

Process low limit DO

000.0 to 150.0 %

050.0 %

INTEGER 16

MENU 3

7500

Process high limit alarm

7501

Process low limit alarm

MENU 3

7502

Process switches

MENU 3

7559

Process control action

MENU 4

1758

MENU 4

1770

MENU 4

4536

System A rated react. power


System A voltage
monitoring
Voltage low limit

90%

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

MENU 3

Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Direct ; 0
Indirect ; 1
000000.1 to 999999.9
kvar
Phase - phase ; 0
Phase - neutral ; 1
000 to 150 %

MENU 4

4537

Voltage high limit

000 to 150 %

110%

INTEGER 16

MENU 4

5600

Voltage control setpoint

000050 to 650000 V

000480 V

MENU 4

5603

001.00 to 300.00 %/s

005.00 %/s

MENU 4

5613

MENU 4

5614

Voltage control setpoint


ramp
VAR control proportional
gain
VAR control integral gain

MENU 4

5615

MENU 4

MENU 4

Woodward

0
0
1
000190.0 kvar
0

000.01 to 100.00

001.00

000.01 to 100.00

000.50

VAR control derivative ratio

000.01 to 100.00

000.01

5620

Power factor reference

-00.999 to 01.000

1.000

UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

5621

Constant gen. PF reference -00.999 to 01.000

00.950

INTEGER 16

2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
0

Page 189/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Namespace1

Namespace2

ID

Parameter Text

Setting Range

MENU 4

5622

000.01 to 100.00 %/s

7509

Reactive power setpoint


ramp
Voltage low alarm

MENU 4

MENU 4

7510

Voltage high alarm

MENU 4

7511

Voltage switches

MENU 4

7512

Voltage range alarm

MENU 4

7558

VAR PF control mode

MENU 4

7635

MENU 4

7723

VAR control setpoint


source
KVAR reference

MENU 5

1701

MENU 5

System management
-

1702

Reset factory default


values
Device number

MENU 5

1750

System rated frequency

MENU 5

1754

MENU 5

MENU 5

Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
Disabled ; 0
Enabled ; 1
PF Control ; 0
VAR Control ; 1
Constant Generator PF ; 2
Internal ; 0
Interface ; 1
-999999.9 to
999999.9 kvar
No ; 0
Yes ; 1
033 to 048

Default Value

Data Type

CL

010.00 %/s

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16
SIGNED 32

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
32
UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

0
0
1
0
1
0
000010.0 kvar
0
33

System A rated current

50Hz ; 0
60Hz ; 1
00001 to 32000 A

00500 A

1766

System A rated voltage

000050 to 650000 V

000480 V

1781

System B rated voltage

000050 to 650000 V

000480 V

MENU 5

Transformer

1800

050 to 480 V

MENU 5

Transformer

1801

MENU 5

Transformer

1803

MENU 5

Transformer

1804

MENU 5

Transformer

1806

MENU 5

Transformer

1812

MENU 5

Transformer

1813

MENU 5

1850

System A PT secondary
rated voltage
System A PT primary rated
voltage
System B PT secondary
rated voltage
System B PT primary rated
voltage
System A CT primary rated
current
System B PT secondary
rated voltage
System B PT primary rated
voltage
System A current input

MENU 5

1851

System A voltage
measuring

MENU 5

1853

MENU 5

1858

Aux system B voltage


meas.
1Ph2W voltage input

MENU 5

1859

1Ph2W phase rotation

MENU 5

Config_Serial1

3163

Baudrate

MENU 5

Config_Serial2

3170

Baudrate

Page 190/198

000050 to 650000 V
050 to 480 V

120 V
000480 V
120 V

000050 to 650000 V

000480 V

00001 to 32000 A/x

00500 A/x

050 to 480 V
000050 to 650000 V
L1 L2 L3 ; 0
Phase L1 ; 1
Phase L2 ; 2
Phase L3 ; 3
3Ph 4W ; 0
3Ph 3W ; 1
n/a ; 2
n/a ; 3
3Ph 4W OD ; 4
3Ph 4W ; 0
3Ph 3W ; 1
Phase - neutral ; 0
Phase - phase ; 1
CW ; 0
CCW ; 1
9600 Bd ; 0
14.4 kBd ; 1
19.2 kBd ; 2
38.4 kBd ; 3
56 kBd ; 4
115 kBd ; 5
9600 Bd ; 0
14.4 kBd ; 1
19.2 kBd ; 2
38.4 kBd ; 3
56 kBd ; 4
115 kBd ; 5

120 V
000480 V
0

1
0
2

2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Namespace1

Namespace2

ID

Parameter Text

Setting Range

Default Value

Data Type

CL

MENU 5

Config_Serial2

3171

Parity

UNSIGNED
16

Config_Serial2

3172

Stop bits

Config_Serial2

3173

Full-, halfduplex mode

MENU 5

3181

MENU 5

3182

Power [W] exponent


10^x
Voltage [V] exponent 10^x

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

MENU 5

No ; 0
Even ; 1
Odd ; 2
One ; 0
Two ; 1
Halfduplex ; 0
Fullduplex ; 1
02 to 05

MENU 5

-01 to 02

INTEGER 16

MENU 5

3183

Current [A] exponent 10^x

-01 to 00

INTEGER 16

MENU 5

Config_Serial1

3185

Modbus slave ID

000 to 255

MENU 5

Config_Serial1

3186

Reply delay time

0.00 to 1.00 s

MENU 5

Config_Serial2

3188

Modbus slave ID

000 to 255

MENU 5

Config_Serial2

3189

Reply delay time

0.00 to 2.55 s

MENU 5

4544

Basic segment number

00001 to 00008

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

MENU 5

4707

Number of MSLC
communicating

00001 to 00016

INTEGER 16

MENU 5

4708

00000 to 00032

INTEGER 16

MENU 5

Network B

5430

Number of DSLC
communicating
TCP/IP address 0

000 to 255

192

MENU 5

Network B

5431

TCP/IP address 1

000 to 255

168

MENU 5

Network B

5432

TCP/IP address 2

000 to 255

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16

MENU 5

Network B

5433

TCP/IP address 3

000 to 255

33

UNSIGNED
16

MENU 5

5800

Upper voltage limit

100 to 150 %

110%

UNSIGNED
16

MENU 5

5801

Lower voltage limit

050 to 100 %

90%

MENU 5

5802

Upper frequency limit

100.0 to 150.0 %

110.0 %

MENU 5

5803

Lower frequency limit

050.0 to 100.0 %

090.0 %

MENU 5

7624

MENU 5

Tie

7625

MENU 5

7626

MENU 5

Tie

7627

MENU 5

7628

Smaller segment at measurement


Switch dead bus A -> dead
bus B
Switch alive bus A -> dead
bus B
Switch alive bus B -> dead
bus A
Type of MSLC breaker

MENU 5

7649

MENU 5

System management
System management
System management

10401

System A ; 0
System B ; 1
No ; 0
Yes ; 1
No ; 0
Yes ; 1
No ; 0
Yes ; 1
Tie ; 0
Utility ; 1
No ; 0
Yes ; 1
0000 to 9999

1805

0000 to 9999

1805

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16

MENU 5
MENU 5

Woodward

10404
10411

Auxiliary system B
available
Password for serial
interface1
Password for remote config.
Supercommissioning
level code

0000 to 9999

0.00 s
1
0.00 s

0
1
1
1
1
0

2
2

2
2
2
2

2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
5

Page 191/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Namespace1

Namespace2

Parameter Text

Setting Range

MENU 5

System management
System management
System management
System management
System management
System management
System management
Remote Load
Reference Input
Remote Load
Reference Input
Process Signal
Input
Process Signal
Input
Reactive Load Input
Reactive Load Input
Remote Load
Reference Input

10412

0000 to 9999

10415

Temp. supercomm. level


code
Commissioning code
level
Temp. commissioning code
level
Basic code level

10417

Factory default settings

10430

1805

0000 to 9999

1805

7673

Password for serial


interface2
Password for Ethernet port
2
User defined min display
value
User defined max display
value
User defined min display
value
User defined max display
value
User defined min display
value
User defined max display
value
HW signal

No ; 0
Yes ; 1
0000 to 9999

MENU 6

Process Signal
Input

7674

HW signal

MENU 6

Reactive Load Input

7675

HW signal

MENU 6

7732

Process engineering unit

MENU 6

7733

MENU 6

7734

MENU 6

7735

MENU 6

7736

MENU 6

7737

MENU 5
MENU 5
MENU 5
MENU 5
MENU 5
MENU 5
MENU 6
MENU 6
MENU 6
MENU 6
MENU 6
MENU 6
MENU 6

Page 192/198

ID

10413
10414

10435
4311
4312
4322
4323
4333
4334

Default Value

Data Type

CL
5

-100.0 to 100.0 %

000.0 %

UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
UNSIGNED
16
INTEGER 16

-100.0 to 100.0 %

100.0 %

INTEGER 16

-100.0 to 100.0 %

000.0 %

INTEGER 16

000.0 to 100.0 %

100.0 %

INTEGER 16

-00.999 to 00.999 PF

-00.990 PF

INTEGER 16

-00.999 to 00.999 PF

00.710 PF

INTEGER 16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

UNSIGNED
16

Process min value

0 - 20mA ; 0
4 - 20mA ; 1
0 - 10V ; 2
0 - 5V ; 3
1 - 5V ; 4
0 - 20mA ; 0
4 - 20mA ; 1
0 - 10V ; 2
0 - 5V ; 3
1 - 5V ; 4
0 - 20mA ; 0
4 - 20mA ; 1
0 - 10V ; 2
0 - 5V ; 3
1 - 5V ; 4
kW ; 0
C ; 1
kPa ; 2
bar ; 3
V;4
mA ; 5
-999999.9 to 999999.9

-000500.0

SIGNED 32

Process max value

-999999.9 to 999999.9

000500.0

SIGNED 32

Remote load ref min


value
Remote load ref max
value
Process reference

-999999.9 to
999999.9 kW
-999999.9 to
999999.9 kW
-999999.9 to 999999.9

000000.0 kW

SIGNED 32

000500.0 kW

SIGNED 32

000000.2

SIGNED 32

0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0

3
3
1
0
0
0
2

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Appendix E.
Service Options

Product Service Options

The following factory options are available for servicing Woodward equipment, based on the standard Woodward Product and Service Warranty (5-01-1205) that is in effect at the time the product is purchased from
Woodward or the service is performed. If you are experiencing problems with installation or unsatisfactory performance of an installed system, the following options are available:
Consult the troubleshooting guide in the manual.
Contact Woodward technical assistance (see "How to Contact Woodward" later in this chapter) and discuss
your problem. In most cases, your problem can be resolved over the phone. If not, you can select which
course of action you wish to pursue based on the available services listed in this section.

Returning Equipment For Repair

If a control (or any part of an electronic control) is to be returned to Woodward for repair, please contact Woodward in advance to obtain a Return Authorization Number. When shipping the unit(s), attach a tag with the following information:

name and location where the control is installed;


name and phone number of contact person;
complete Woodward part numbers (P/N) and serial number (S/N);
description of the problem;
instructions describing the desired type of repair.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed
Circuit Boards and Modules.

Woodward

Page 193/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Packing A Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:

protective caps on any connectors;


antistatic protective bags on all electronic modules;
packing materials that will not damage the surface of the unit;
at least 100 mm (4 inches) of tightly packed, industry-approved packing material;
a packing carton with double walls;
a strong tape around the outside of the carton for increased strength.

Return Authorization Number RAN


When returning equipment to Woodward, please telephone and ask for the Customer Service Department in
Stuttgart [+49 (0) 711 789 54-0]. They will help expedite the processing of your order through our distributors or
local service facility. To expedite the repair process, contact Woodward in advance to obtain a Return Authorization Number and arrange for issue of a purchase order for the unit(s) to be repaired. No work can be started until
a purchase order is received.

NOTE
We highly recommend that you make arrangement in advance for return shipments. Contact a
Woodward customer service representative at +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 for instructions and for a Return Authorization Number.

Replacement Parts

When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
the part numbers P/N (XXXX-XXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate;
the unit serial number S/N, which is also on the nameplate.

Page 194/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

How To Contact Woodward

Please contact following address if you have questions or if you want to send a product for repair:
Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29
70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone:
Fax:
e-mail:

+49 (0) 711 789 54-0


+49 (0) 711 789 54-100
[email protected]

(8.00 - 16.30 German time)

For assistance outside Germany, call one of the following international Woodward facilities to obtain the address
and phone number of the facility nearest your location where you will be able to get information and service.
Facility
USA
India
Brazil
Japan
The Netherlands

Phone number
+1 (970) 482 5811
+91 (129) 409 7100
+55 (19) 3708 4800
+81 (476) 93 4661
+31 (23) 566 1111

You can also contact the Woodward Customer Service Department or consult our worldwide directory on
Woodwards website (www.woodward.com) for the name of your nearest Woodward distributor or service facility. [For worldwide directory information, go to www.woodward.com/ic/locations.]

Woodward

Page 195/198

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Engineering Services

Woodward Industrial Controls Engineering Services offers the following after-sales support for Woodward products. For these services, you can contact us by telephone, by e-mail, or through the Woodward website.

Technical support
Product training
Field service during commissioning

Technical Support is available through our many worldwide locations, through our authorized distributors, or
through GE Global Controls Services, depending on the product. This service can assist you with technical questions or problem solving during normal business hours. Emergency assistance is also available during nonbusiness hours by phoning our toll-free number and stating the urgency of your problem. For technical engineering support, please contact us via our toll-free or local phone numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference technical support.
Product Training is available on-site from several of our worldwide facilities, at your location, or from GE
Global Controls Services, depending on the product. This training, conducted by experienced personnel, will assure that you will be able to maintain system reliability and availability. For information concerning training,
please contact us via our toll-free or local phone numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference customer
training.
Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product and location, from our facility in
Colorado, or from one of many worldwide Woodward offices or authorized distributors. Field engineers are experienced on both Woodward products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which our
products interface. For field service engineering assistance, please contact us via our toll-free or local phone
numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference field service.

Page 196/198

Woodward

Manual 37444A

MSLC-2 - Master Synchronizer and Load Control

Technical Assistance

If you need to telephone for technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information. Please write
it down here before phoning:

Contact
Your company ____________________________________________________
Your name _______________________________________________________
Phone number ____________________________________________________
Fax number ______________________________________________________

Control (see name plate)


Unit no. and revision:
P/N: ____________________ REV: _____________
Unit type
Serial number

__________________________________________
S/N _______________________________________

Description of your problem


_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Please be sure you have a list of all parameters available. You can print this using ToolKit. Additionally you can
save the complete set of parameters (standard values) and send them to our Service department via e-mail.

Woodward

Page 197/198

We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.


Please send comments to: [email protected]
Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication.

Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29 - 70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 Fax +49 (0) 711 789 54-100
[email protected]
Homepage
http://www.woodward.com

Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries and branches, as well as authorized


distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address/phone/fax/e-mail information
for all locations is available on our website (www.woodward.com).

2011/05/Stuttgart

You might also like